Brack, Antoine Fortune De, 1789-1850 
 Pocket manual for cavalrymen 
 

Pocket Manual 
 
 for 
 
 Cavalrymen 
 
 
 Issued for 
 
 Officers and Non-Commissioned Officers 
 of the 
 
 52nd. Cavalry Brigade, 
 Pennsylvania National Guard 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2016 with funding from 
 Duke University Libraries 
 
 
 
 https://archive.org/details/pocketmanualforc02brac 
 
 
POCKET MANUAL 
 
 /I 
 
 FOR 
 
 CAVALRYMEN 
 
 Extracts from a book by F. de Brack, 
 Colonel of Cavalry under Napoleon 
 
 
 Printed June 1, 1922 for the 52nd. Cavalry 
 Brigade, Pennsylvania National Guard 
 
 PRESS OF 
 
 THE TELEGRAPH PRINTING CO. 
 
 Harrisburg. Pa. 
 
357 . 18 
 £ 797 /° 
 
 “General Steingel, an Alsatian, was an excellent hussar of- 
 ficer; he had served under Dumouriez In the northern campaigns, 
 and was a clever, intelligent and extremely vigilant man. To all 
 the characteristics of youth he joined those of mature years; he 
 was an ideal outpost general. Two or three days before his death 
 he was the first one to enter Lezegno; the French general who ar- 
 rived a few hours later found that all his wants had been antici- 
 pated and everything prepared for his future operations. 
 
 "The fords and defiles had been reoonnoitered, guides employed, 
 the cure and postmaster interrogated, friendly relations established 
 with the inhabitants, spies sent out in various directions, the 
 letters in the post-office seized, and all those containing military 
 information had been translated and abstracts of their contents 
 made, and all necessary measures taken to establish magazines of 
 supplies for the subsistence of the army” — Napoleon. 
 
 
' • - i ■ • : • ' r 
 
 -iy; i. . . v . i 
 
 ’ . 
 
 - W? i,!, i .1 . '■ : 'i 
 
 i: r 1 '■ ; . 
 
 - ' - ■ . » • . ■ : 
 
 Ik. : . •. k . . ■ , , 
 
 : ’ :■ - . ' 
 
 t j t 
 
 .... . . cub 
 
 . wsi c 
 
 .r . i; L ' — " .• • . • . ■ 
 
 c .. ji •'< mR 
 
 ; . . '• 
 
 ■ 
 
 .... . r 
 
 " 
 
 
FOREWORD 
 
 The scientific discoveries and mechanical Inventions of th© 
 past century have made such vast changes in the implements and 
 mechanisms of war, that a treatise written from experience ob- 
 tained in the Napoleonic wars seems archaic in its allusions to 
 arms and the methods of their employment. But the fundamental 
 principles of cavalry outpost duty are so unchanging that De 
 Brack’s manual still remains the primary source from which all 
 later writers upon the subject have, directly or indirectly, derived 
 their inspiration. 
 
 A compilation of the more important passages of enduring 
 value from this cavalry classic will interest the enthusiasm of 
 officers of all branches of the military service; and will be very 
 useful for instructional purposes in the mounted branches. In 
 making available the permanently useful portions of DeBrack's 
 too little known and not generally accessible work a very im- 
 portant service is being performed. 
 
 John P. Wood, 
 
 Brigadier-General, Cavalry, P.N.G. 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The book from which these extracts are taken, was written by 
 one of the most brilliant Cavalry officers of the French Empire, 
 and is founded upon the actual experience of a distinguished 
 cavalry officer who fought through eight campaigns under the 
 generals of Napoleon. 
 
 Written in 1831, after an absence of 15 years from the service, 
 Lieutenant Colonel F. DeBrack, in command of the Eight Hussars, 
 wished to prepare his officers and men for the war which it was 
 believed was impending. He felt that the service had been sur- 
 feited with theories at the expense of practical instruction, and 
 his book is a mine of knowledge and inspiration to veterans and 
 young officers alike. 
 
 The demands of economy prevent republication of the book in its 
 entirety. Efforts to secure additional copies have failed. Much of 
 the text is inapplicable to modern units by virtue of dissimilarity 
 of small arms, uniforms, etc But the principles enunciated in 
 DeBrack’s book, and the spirited style, make it an extremely 
 valuable pocket manual for the officers and non-commissioned 
 officers of every cavalry regiment, no matter what the nationality 
 or period of existence. 
 
 By authority of John P. Wood, Brigadier-General of Cavalry, 
 Pennsylvania National Guard, Commanding the 52nd Cavalry 
 Brigade, and through the assistance of Adjutant General Frank D. 
 Beary, State of Pennsylvania, this booklet is published for the 
 officers and non-commissioned officers of the brigade. 
 
 Edward J. Stackpole, Jr., 
 
 Colonel 104th Cavalry, 
 
 Penna. National Guard. 
 
v;-. . . ■' -r . . ! 
 
 _V. : ■ . "5 T -I •'’>« ' 
 
 : -J* - 
 
 ViV: V ■/ ' V-.- . • v 
 
 - ... . ' ' 
 
 . e. ,i , c i ' 
 
 ■ : ■ *. •.. . fa iT, .. .. .1--.'. :• -• "i 
 
 Vo rfouSfT * . i ... ' ■ 5 • ! »W3 
 
 tf -. ' ‘ ’ is- ' i •' *• tx»i = 
 
 y)e .-•.i-.s r.i; i 1 ■■ 
 
 — . - .no: -. -! ' ’ I - . •>' : •' 
 
 yV V-. . ■ a. er 1 • 
 
 ' 
 
 - 
 
 j 1 i# ' i 
 
 L !V;-. : ■ 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 (de Brack) 
 
 One must be born a light-cavalryman. No other position requires 
 so much natural aptitude, such innate genius for war, as that of 
 an officer of that arm. The qualities which make the superior man 
 — intelligence, will, force — should be found united in him. on- 
 stantly left dependent on himself, exposed to frequent combats, 
 responsible not only for his own command, but as well for that 
 which he protects and guards, the employment of his physical 
 and moral powers is continuous. The profession which he prac- 
 tices is a rude one, but the opportunities of distinguishing him- 
 self are presented daily — glorious compensation which the more 
 richly rewards his labors by enabling his true (worth to become 
 the sooner known. 
 
 I have often mentioned to you General Curely, lieutenant with 
 me in 1807; he became a general in 1813. But in 1806, while twenty 
 leagues in advance of our army, and at the head of twenty men of 
 the Seventh Hussars, he struck terror into Leipsic, where 3000 
 Prussians were stationed. In 1809 , while fifteen leagues in advance 
 of the division to which he belonged, and at the head of 100 men 
 of the Seventh Chasseurs and Ninth Hussars, he passed unper- 
 ceived through the Austro-ltalian army, which it was his object to 
 reconnoitre, and penetrated as far as the headquarters of the 
 Archduke, the general-in-chief. 
 
 In 1812, at Pultusk, with 100 men of the Twentieth Chasseurs 
 he captured from the enemy twenty-four pieces of artillery, and 
 took the general-in-chief of the Russian army a prisoner. 
 
 * * 
 
 To be a good officer of the advanced-guard it is not enough to 
 be brave and to command well under fire; one must bring to the 
 place of action the greatest number of men and have them in the 
 best condition for exerting the greatest power. This second part of 
 our instruction, indispensable as it is, though not the most brilli- 
 ant, is undoubtedly the most important. It is dependent upon a 
 number of things, and cannot be learned in garrison. 
 
 A habit of judging the health of men and horses, an acquaint- 
 ance with the ready remedies applicable in certain cases, a daily 
 and scrupulous inspection of the trappings, knowledge of the 
 repairs that should be made, inspection of the equipments and 
 of the repairs which they need, supplying all that may be useful 
 to man and beast without overloading the horses, packing well 
 understood, regularity of gaits in the columns on the march, 
 good position of the bivouacs, continuous watchfulness in them 
 of all that may affect the health of the horses, indication of the 
 means of temporarily dispensing with the farrier, instructions 
 for the employment of the instruments contained in the surgical 
 case, the art of eating and sleeping seasonably, study of the 
 character of the men under our orders, the maintenance of a 
 discipline which will prevent the troopers arguing when they 
 have no longer the guardhouse or prison to fear, a constant 
 superintendence which will prevent the useless (waste of the 
 horses’ strength, to set a personal example in every situation — 
 all the more carefully as the conditions become more toilsome 
 and difficult — to inspire the troops with entire confidence, de- 
 votion, and enthusiasm — those are what the theoretical instruc- 
 tions of peaceful times do not teach; those are what, joined to 
 courage, the military coup d’oeil to promptness of judgment on 
 the field of battle, make the truly distinguished officer. 
 
 9 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 It is to prepare you tor the practical knowledge of outpost 
 duty that I have recorded for you these recollections — this species 
 of manual that I offer you; which I have preceded by these re- 
 flections, forming, in a manner, their preface. 
 
 * * 
 
 Study is the arsenal from which you will draw your arms for 
 the day of action. To study carefully assists us to think and 
 act quickly, and to do this is the secret of success as a model 
 officer. Nowhere so much as in the light cavalry does one 
 recognize the complete application of this saying of a distinguished 
 officer: “PROMPTITUDE IS GENIUS.” 
 
 • • 
 
 In the matter of instruction one is rich on the day of appli- 
 cation only when he has an excess of it. When this great day 
 has arrived it is too late to learn; it is time to choose the best 
 and forget the useless. Moreover, war presents so many varying 
 opportunities, becomes so complicated by different situations, 
 that the reserve of our knowledge may also find its unexpected 
 application, and if this application can be made only once in 
 our lifetime it repays a year of labor. 
 
 10 
 
THE CAVALRYMANS HAND-BOOK 
 
 THE DUTIES OF LIGHT CAVALRY 
 
 Q. What is the duty of light cavalry in campaign? 
 
 A. To clear the way for the army and protect its maroh. 
 
 Q. How does it accomplish this object? 
 
 A. By preceding our columns, scouting their flanks, surrounding 
 them and concealing them with a bold and vigilant curtain; fol- 
 lowing the enemy step by step, harassing and annoying him, dis- 
 covering his designs, exhausting his forces in detail, destroying 
 his magazines, capturing his convoys, and, finally, forcing him 
 to expend in defensive operations the strength from which he 
 might otherwise have reaped the greatest advantage. 
 
 THE CHIEF IN CAMPAIGN. THE OFFICER 
 
 0- What is the meaning of chief? (As used in this book, 
 “chief” applies to a cavalry sergeant as well as to a general 
 officer, whenever the responsibility of command is assumed.) 
 
 A. Head. Example. 
 
 Q. What are the first qualities required in a commander of 
 light cavalry on the day of battle? 
 
 A. 1. Clear perception, and cool, mathematical estimation 
 of his own strength and that of the enemy. 
 
 2. The sure and rapid glance which recognizes and compre- 
 hends the frame of mind of the force which he commands, as 
 well as that of the one he attacks. 
 
 3. The glance with which, from whatever side he approaches 
 the field, he takes it in as a whole, and in its minutest details 
 as to distances, accidents, possibilities and Impossibilities for at- 
 tack, defence or retreat. 
 
 4. Quickness of decision and action. 
 
 5. The dash which oarries everything before it. 
 
 6. The firmness which despairs of nothing and retrieves the 
 most desperate situation. 
 
 7. The calmness which never changes countenance, and causes 
 his subordinates to see only with his eyes. Add to these quali- 
 ties the courage which sets the example, the justice which re- 
 wards fully, and you have the model commander who, under all 
 circumstances, holds in hand a hundred squadrons as one, leads 
 them on, stops them as a single man, wins or snatches victory, 
 overawes her as though she were a mistress. This combination 
 of qualities is called first NAPOLEON, then FREDERICK, MAS- 
 SENA, SOULT, NEY, KLEBER DESSAIX, HOCHE, LANNES, 
 MORAND, LASALLE. 
 
 The face of a chief is often consulted; he should never forget 
 that, and should allow it to be read only when he especially 
 desires it to be read. 
 
 Thus at the time of an expedition of which he alone possesses 
 the secret, if it is necessary that the men should not discover 
 this secret until the arrival of the proper time, the calmness of 
 their chief should prevent any feeling of uneasiness entering 
 their ranks. 
 
 Q. Where is the position of the chief in a fight? 
 
 A. Always at the place of command. 
 
 Q. But suppose there are several such positions? 
 
 A. There can be but one for the experienced chief; thus, 
 for example, when the chief upon the battle-field commands sev- 
 eral squadrons in echelon, which he is going to launch succes- 
 
 11 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 sively, he ought to restrain his ardor and not put himself at 
 the head of '.he first, except under peculiar circumstances; it 
 is better to launch the first and take the head of the second; 
 in this manner he can comprehend at a glance the whole affair; 
 he keeps in hand all his force, which he can readily advance in 
 case of success, or use as a reserve in the event of a repulse. 
 
 If, under certain circumstances, he believes he ought to march 
 at the head of the leading squadron, he should do so only after 
 having given to the other squadron commanders orders so precise 
 that it will be impossible for any doubt to arise during the 
 onset, no matter what may happen, and as soon as possible he 
 ought to return to the squadrons he has left. 
 
 * * 
 
 If a detachment of another regiment, cavalry or infantry, joins 
 his, the chief should go to meet it and give it in the presence 
 of his own command some marks of his esteem. The example 
 will be quickly followed, and the detachment will soon become 
 a part of the family. 
 
 During the campaign of 1809, a battalion of the Seventh 
 Light Infantry was ordered on detached service with the Seventh 
 Hussars, to which I belonged; the infantry was received with 
 open arms by our hussars. 
 
 The two regiments conceived for each other so warm a friend- 
 ship, that afterwards, saying seven and seven make fourteen, the 
 hussars responded to the challenge; “Who goes there?” “The 
 Fourteenth Hussars”, and the infantry “The Fourteenth Light 
 Infantry.” 
 
 An opportunity of proving this friendship was soon found, for 
 we were attacked at a distance of a few leagues from Ratisbon 
 by a very superior force, and would have been obliged to yield 
 had it not been for the mutual dash and devotion which it 
 inspired. 
 
 Some chiefs who have received the order to go into bivouao 
 neglect to do so at once, and while they thus needlessly consume 
 time and the strength of their horses, other regiments dismount, 
 install themselves, and monopolize the forage and provisions: 
 this is a glaring fault on the part of the chief of the regi- 
 ment deprived of its rights, and one which has great influence 
 upon the minds of the men. 
 
 The officer of experience in active service possesses a foresight 
 which enables him to determine perfectly in advance, the 
 halting-place for his division, his brigade, and the bivouac which 
 his regiment or detachment will occupy. To install himself 
 quickly or slowly, to place himself a hundred paces to the right 
 or left, near to or distant from a wood, from a stream, and above 
 all a village, is not a matter of indifference. Upon this choice, 
 in the end, will depend the efficiency of the regiment. Given 
 
 two chiefs of equal merit in other respects, of whom one shall 
 select good bivouacs and the other poor ones, at the end of 
 the campaign the first will find under his orders a strong force 
 in good condition, while the second will be followed no longer 
 except by a few broken-down horses. 
 
 Let the officer prepare and instruct himself if he desires to 
 succeed; let him employ every moment in studying his profession 
 in its smallest details; let him learn all that a trooper has to 
 do; in garrison, let his colonel assure himself that he knows 
 how to groom a horse, to clean his arms and equipment; one 
 cannot intelligently order what he is ignorant of himself. 
 
 * * 
 
 If he enjoys the advantage of being stationed in a garrison 
 with troops of other arms, let him, in his spare moments run 
 to the arsenals; to the works in course of construction by the 
 
 12 
 
CLO THIN G—E Q UIPMEN T 
 
 engineers; to the ordnance yards of the artillery; to the drill- 
 ground of the infantry; there only will he learn the relations 
 of the different arms to one another; will estimate the diffi- 
 culties and possibilities of attack and defence by studying the 
 rapidity of formations, distances, firing, etc. And if upon the 
 frontier or during an armistice he- finds strange bivouacs, bar- 
 racks and drill-grounds, let his military coup d'oeil retain 
 faithfully the improvements which he recognizes among them, 
 and with which he may enrich his own service on his return. 
 
 Finally, let the officer remember that FACILITY IN ACQUIR- 
 ING KNOWLEDGE IS A POWER, AND THAT IN SPITE OF 
 EVERYTHING, POWER ALWAYS TRIUMPHS. 
 
 CLOTHING. EQUIPMENT 
 
 In war one very quickly perceives the inconvenience of the 
 garments which in garrison were required to fit so snugly, of 
 the Doots which were ordered made so tight. When, in bivouac, 
 the cramped limbs can find no repose; when the boots, dried 
 by the fire, shrink still more upon feet already swollen by fati- 
 gue, when their thin soles have broken through and refuse 
 
 further service — one would give a great deal to be able to ex- 
 change his natty costume for a comfortable jacket and a pair 
 of large, easy-fitting boots; but the time for that has passed; 
 the campaign must be made under the most fatiguing conditions, 
 and the officer will be doomed to see his elegant apparel reduced 
 to rags, as its tightness will make it tear everywhere, and in 
 such a manner that it cannot be repaired. 
 
 It is then that one discovers the usefulness of the housewife 
 — so despised and so entirely neglected in time of peace. He 
 who has neither thread, needles, wax, buttons, scissors, nor 
 
 knife, will have to depend upon borrowing; but lenders are few. 
 because those who possess such articles are the provident, and 
 the foresight which induced them to provide themselves with 
 these necessaries will make them keep them for their own use. 
 
 Young officers, listen to this advice, based upon my own ex- 
 perience: never carry a large portmanteau, for it will prove to 
 
 be only a hindrance. 
 
 An officer, no matter what may be his grade, needs no more 
 baggage than a trooper requires. 
 
 Two jackets, two pairs of cloth trousers, three or four shirts, 
 and two pairs of boots should fully suffice for a campaign of 
 
 eighteen months. They should all be new, of good quality, and 
 
 fit comfortably. A housewife, supplied with thread, buttons, 
 needles, etc., should accompany them and always be ready for 
 use in repairing the slightest rent as soon as it appears. By 
 taking these precautions you will save yourself a world of pri- 
 vations and annoyances, which might degenerate Into actual mis- 
 fortune, and have a greater influence than you can foresee upon 
 your military career. 
 
 In war certain articles are used up more rapidly than others; 
 among these are boots. Supply yourself with those having thick 
 soles, studded with small nails and let them be wide and at least 
 of an inch longer than your foot. 
 
 In war only the useful and durable are the elegant. 
 
 All leather articles which in peace are iwaxed, in war should 
 be greased. In doing this there are several advantages: first, 
 
 the multitude of brushes, embarrassing on account of their num- 
 ber, volume and weight, may be dispensed with; second, the 
 life of the leather will be prolonged; third, the leather will be 
 less liable to injury by moisture. 
 
 When leather gets wet beware of drying it quickly at a fire. 
 
 13 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 An officer should wear next to his skin a belt of soft leather 
 or strong linen, in which to put a few pieces of gold coin. That 
 is his purse. There would be no harm in his sewing a few 
 of these pieces between the cloth and the lining of one of his 
 oldest jackets. In his trouser pockets he should put a memoran- 
 dum book, a good pencil, a small pocket compass, a tin spoon, a 
 strong knife which has besides its ordinary blade, a penknife 
 and hoof pick, an awl, a lancet, and a steel. In order to prevent 
 this knife from being lost, it would be well to have an eye in 
 the lower part of the handle, to allow a string to be attached 
 to It, the other end of which iwould be fastened to the trousers 
 pocket. 
 
 Overcoats are issued to troopers to protect them, as well 
 as their arms and ammunition, from the weather. In peace the 
 march need not be delayed to give time to put them on, because, 
 as the trooper will reach his destination at an early hour, he 
 can find the time and means necessary to dry himself; but in 
 war that cannot be counted upon, so, as soon as it begins to rain, 
 have the overcoats unrolled and put on; after the rain has ceased, 
 allow them to remain upon the men long enough to dry, then 
 have your men, as they should be trained to do, reroll and re- 
 place them on their saddles, as they march along. At the first 
 halt the coats will be overhauled and any faults in packing 
 remedied, under the supervision of the squadron and platoon 
 commanders. 
 
 * * 
 
 The great quantity of clothing allowed the trooper has nec- 
 essitated a valise much too large; a campaign will hardly have 
 begun before the greater part of these useless things will be 
 thrown aside and lost; but it is to be feared that the horse will 
 gain but little by this temporary diminution of weight. The 
 trooper will replace his linen trousers by rags which he will pile 
 upon his poor horse without in any way benefitting himself. It 
 is absolutely necessary, then, that officers should make frequent 
 and unexpected inspections of the valises, and order every for- 
 bidden article found in them to be thrown away or destroyed, and 
 punish severely the troopers, who, in spite of orders to the con- 
 trary, persist in exhausting the strength of their horses in trans- 
 porting useless, and frequently stolen, property. 
 
 At the present day the weight oarried by a light-cavalry horse 
 is from 246 to 253 pounds, and this weight is naturally much 
 increased in rainy weather. Add to that the weight of the 
 rations, and you can easily see that it is necessary to be very 
 strict in regard to the (weights allowed to be carried. 
 
 Sometimes officers have their personal supplies carried on the 
 horses of their grooms; the chief should positively forbid this, 
 and severely punish any officer guilty of a repetition of the 
 offense, after having been once cautioned. The trooper's horse 
 belongs to the government, and should be employed only in its 
 service. 
 
 HORSE EQUIPMENTS. PACKING 
 
 Q. Why does it often happen that a non-commissioned officer 
 or soldier does not receive the promotion, the cross, which he 
 might have obtained. 
 
 A. Because, instead of continuing with the war squadrons to 
 which he belonged, he remained in rear, at one of the small 
 depots. 
 
 14 
 
HORSE EQUIPMENT— PACKING 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because his horse was injured and unfit for service. 
 
 Q. What injured him? 
 
 A. The saddle. 
 
 Q. Why did the saddle injure him? 
 
 A. Because the chief of squadron in assigning it, and the 
 soldier in receiving it, failed to study carefully the proper bear- 
 ing of the saddle on the horse's back. 
 
 The first thing to be done when a saddle is received is to 
 place the naked tree on the horse’s back to see that the bars fit 
 properly; that they are parallel to the surface on which they are 
 placed; to judge beforehand the changes of position which will 
 be effected in these surfaces by the movements of the horse, so 
 that the weight of the saddle may be, as nearly as possible, dis- 
 tributed over the whole, and not bear upon a portion of the bars 
 only. The slightly convex form of the bars is given to them for 
 the sole purpose of preserving a perfect equilibrium in all pos- 
 sible positions of the horse and his rider. To see that the arch 
 of the pommel does not constrain the withers, either by pinching 
 them laterally or compressing them in their upper portion; that 
 the arch of the cantle is high enough and the fork sufficiently 
 elevated to prevent the valise resting on the loins when it is 
 attached; that the bars are smooth, so that there may be no 
 rough spots to produce abrasions of the skin; that the pegs, made 
 of green wood, and afterward dried, do not project from their 
 holes in a way to produce injury; that the saddle seat is not so 
 law as to throw the rider on the backbone of the horse, instead 
 of keeping him away from it, thus producing pressure and dan- 
 gerous chafing; that the saddle seat is not raised too high be- 
 fore or behind, which, by throwing the rider too much to the front 
 or rear, will make the saddle tilt up, derange the equilibrium, 
 establish a constant, uneven pressure upon the same place, con- 
 strain the horse and rider in their movements, and will surely 
 injure both; that the holsters do not close too tightly on the 
 shoulders, which will constrain their movements and surely 
 wound them. The only way of judging perfectly of the fit of a 
 saddle Is, as I have already said, to place the bare tree upon the 
 horse's back, then mount the ma( upon the tree and see how 
 the pressure acts. 
 
 If, in every movement, the bars are not parallel to the horse’s 
 sides, the pressure will be irregular; for either the tree is too 
 wide, and the bars, pressing only from the inside, will injure the 
 backbone of the horse; or the tree will be too narrow, and the 
 bars, pressing only diagonally, will produce sores upon those 
 parts of the sides which they must bear upon with all the weight 
 of the rider and his load. 
 
 That having been done, the leather parts belonging to the saddle 
 will be attached to it, and it will then be placed carefully upon 
 the folded blanket. The crupper, breast-strap, and girth will be 
 so arranged that by their united action they will hold the saddle 
 securely in the place it should occupy and thus prevent, instead 
 of oausing, injuries to the horse. 
 
 When a saddle fits a horse properly there is no need of fas- 
 tening it, in oeace with either a crupper or breast-strap; which 
 shows plainly that these two pieces of harness should not be 
 tightly drawn — as this would simply result in constraining the 
 movements of the horse, and chafing his skin unnecessarily. On 
 the contrary, the girth should be tightened rather more, because 
 by holding the blanket in position it prevents its becoming dis- 
 placed, to the injury of the horse, and also keeps the saddle in 
 place. 
 
 The captain who adjusts a saddle to the back of a horse of 
 his squadron ought to see not only the immediate effect it will 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
 15 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 produce on the back, rounded by rest in the garrison, but alsc . 
 that which it must produce upon the same back, thinned anc : 
 wasted by the fatigues of war, or of a long march. He shoulc •' 
 be guided, then, not by the fleshy form but by the bony frame o 
 the horse, in forming his opinion. 
 
 When the saddle has been tried as I have just directed, i- 
 should then be packed and mounted; and, in the alterations whicf 1 
 will be suggested by these operations, a large margin must bs 
 allowed for the changes which will be rendered necessary by thi 
 thinness of the horse, as mentioned above. 
 
 After this important labor has been performed, the horse mas ’ 
 be bridled. 
 
 The greatest care should be exercised in the choice of a bit - 
 The conformation of the mouth will suggest the one most suit- 
 able. nevertheless, it may be that after having conformed tc 
 all that the ordinary rules prescribe, the greater cf less sensi 
 bility, general or partial, of the mouth may upset our calcula ; 
 tions; in that case, let us not hesitate to change the bits unti 
 we find one offering the fewest objections. 
 
 After having fitted the bit, guard against doing what I have ; 
 unfortunately seen done in many regiments, and among others 
 my own — that is, shortening the curb-chain in order that the 
 equipments may be handsomer and more uniform. That is sacri- : 
 ficing the useful to the elegant, while, on the contrary, we ought 
 really to sacrifice everything to the useful. Let us leave the 
 curb-chain at its full length, because in certain cases by this 
 means we will be able to give greater freedom to the horse's :: 
 mouth. If a horse dies and is replaced by another, the same bif : 
 can be used, no matter what may be the thickness of the new : 
 horse's chin. If the horse does not obey the bit, applied in the : 
 proper manner, we can let out the chain on one side, twist ir- : 
 regularly, and thus produce a more marked effect upon him. 
 This expedient, useful in certain emergencies, necessarily shortens 
 the length of the curb-chain; but even if the curb-chain breaks. 
 and we lose the broken ring, there will still remain something ; 
 with which to repair damages. 
 
 Let us also guard against drawing the curb-chain, nose-band ana 
 throat-latch too tight; to do so is to torture the horse uselessly - 
 
 restrict his respiration, deprive him of all liberty, all movements ol s 
 
 the bit necessary to refresh the bars of his mouth. It is also a ; 
 mistake to place a bit so as to cause the branches to tilt forward, 
 as the effect of their pressure upon the bars is to fatigue them 
 and destroy their sensibility; it gives to the bit a severity which, 
 far from rendering the horse obedient, too often frets him and 
 makes him wild and stubborn. 
 
 After the equipment has been used for some time, the use 
 made of it, or the moisture of the air, may cause the leather j 
 straps to yield and stretch. We must then readjust it in order 
 that the leather may not become creased or wrinkled; that if 
 may fit the horse perfectly and permit neither chafing nor useless ; 
 swaying. And this operation must be repeated as often as we 
 see the necessity for so doing. 
 
 Q. Why is it that the girth often breaks and throws the 
 rider to the ground? 
 
 A. The girth itself seldom breaks, because it is made of ’ 
 
 strong material, and when this becomes old and stiff enough tc 
 
 break, it is replaced by new; but the girth is attached to the tree 
 by a thong which is as weak as the parts to which it is attached 
 are heavy and strong. Its strength not being proportioned to the 
 other parts, it gives way when not well secured, or breaks wher “ 
 suddenly dried, or weakened by a service of short duration. This 
 thong should be frequently examined, as it Is upon its soundness 
 that our safety depends. 
 
 16 
 
HORSE EQUIPMENT — PACKING 
 
 u Q. The backs of troop horses are generally badly formed, 
 d Some are narrow, others too round, others are lower in front than 
 d behind, others have the contrary fault, and others are swaybacked. 
 )f A. The greater reason why we should examine them carefully 
 in order to fit the saddles to them suitably, 
 it Q. But suppose the horse, in campaign, becomes thinner than 
 h we anticipated on starting out? 
 
 it A. I have already told you that before setting out on a cam- 
 15 paign you should study his bony frame instead of his fleshy form, 
 and that you should be guided in your action by the results of 
 iy that study; however, if you have made the mistake of not seeing 
 what must happen, you must not hestitate to attach pads to the 
 t, saddle-tree. 
 
 (. Q. Of what should these pads be made? 
 
 s A. A bit of coarse linen which can be nailed to the bars and 
 
 ij. then stuffed with hair, or, In default of that, with hay or straw, 
 i. Be careful to drive the nails which secure the pads upon the upper 
 i| face of the bars, (where they cannot possibly come in contact 
 
 with the horse’s back, so that their heads may cause no injuries 
 
 ii by their roughness. 
 
 s, Q. If the horse is low in front or behind? 
 
 k A. You must give greater thickness to your pad in front or 
 
 (. behind, in order to correct this fault of conformation, which is 
 it the more dangerous because the saddle, in moving to the front or 
 K rear, increases the effect of the breast-strap or crupper, and by 
 is that means quickly produces injuries which cannot be cured, be- 
 's cause the cause cannot be entirely removed. Further, by throwing 
 it the weight of the trooper forward or to the rear, out of its proper 
 
 w position, it constrains the paces of the horse, paralyzes his action, 
 
 ,5 and diminishes the power of the trooper through the clumsiness 
 l. produced thereby. 
 
 i, Generally, the troop horses in France are low in front and 
 uihave deficient withers. The manner of folding the blanket only 
 S| partially remedies the defect. There should be in all regiments 
 ig a certain number of saddles made for this class of horses, with 
 the pommel arches higher than those of the cantle. 
 id. General rule; the horse and his rider should be a unit, and 
 
 l to accomplish this the centre of gravity of both should be in the 
 oj'Same place, and the weight should bear on the centre of its sup- 
 a ports. 
 
 d Q. During a campaign, what should be done when a horse’s 
 ni sides are injured? 
 
 h, A. When the blanket has been folded, the surface which 
 
 ,d chafes the injured parts should be covered iwith a linen cloth, in 
 order that the wool may not irritate the sore; then the saddle 
 
 sjjshould be raised by half pads which will bear upon the sound 
 
 ( (l surface, without touching the sore, so that the horse may be 
 (( cured while marching. 
 
 il If, after the sore has healed, and the pads have been removed, 
 jj the saddle continues to hurt the sore, in spite of the care taken 
 ,5 to prevent it, the tree should be exchanged for another. 
 
 Q. If the horse is injured on the withers? 
 j (l A. The front of the saddle should be raised by half pads, 
 covered with linen, and the weight on the saddle be temporarily 
 ( l shifted, by throwing it upon or toward the cantle. 
 tl Q. If injured on the loins? 
 
 A. The folded blanket should be made shorter so that it will 
 e j not touch the sore, the thickness and weight of the valise be di- 
 li { minished by removing some of the contents, which may be placed 
 on the saddle, and afterwards, the valise be raised so that it can 
 I, no longer touch the injured part. If these measures prove unavail- 
 js ing, the valise must be entirely removed. Sometimes the iron 
 plates of the tree are too long and injure the horse in front and 
 
 17 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 or hav 
 
 r. 
 
 in rear. In this case the plates must be shortened 
 
 their sharp edges smoothed down. 
 
 Often the loins are injured by the faulty manner of fold in 
 the jacket, the buttons being allowed to touch the horse. Thi 
 fault may be easily discovered and corrected. 
 
 Q. But what will the trooper do, when deprived of his valise 
 
 A. He will place his two unfolded shirts between the sea 
 and the schabraque, his housewife in his nosebag, put on his bes 
 pair of boots, and send the remainder of his effects back to th 
 sub-depot. 
 
 Q. Should his horse be wounded in the shoulder by the rut 
 bing of his carbine? 
 
 A. The trooper must carry his carbine on his arm until th 
 sore is completely healed. 
 
 Q. Should the horse be injured by the crupper? 
 
 A. It must be loosened and be wrapped with linen cloth, anc 
 if the trouble is not remedied by this, the crupper must be take 
 off entirely. 
 
 Q. Should the horse be injured by the girths? 
 
 A. This will always arise, either from the saddle getting to- 
 far in front, or the girths becoming too dry and hard. In th 
 first case the cause must be removed by saddling farther back 
 and arranging the saddle so that it will not pull too much o 
 crupper; and, in the second, by slightly rasping the edge whicl '■ 
 injures the horse, greasing it, and wrapping it with linen cloth 
 or other soft material such as sheepskin. 
 
 Q. Should the horse’s mouth be injured? 
 
 A. Attack the cause, by raising or lowering the bit, by openini 
 out the upper branches, or by lowering the snaffle 
 
 Often, men, in bridling their horses, do not take care to plac 
 the snaffle above the port of the curb bit, which causes the tw 
 bits, one above the other, to strike the bars together, and in 
 jure the mouth. 
 
 The great art of packing consists of three things: 1st. T 
 
 carry cut only the indispensable. 2nd. To distribute its weigh 
 properly, so that it may bear equally, and thus fatigue the hors 
 as little as possible, and not wound him. 3rd. To give the troope 
 the greatest possible facility in the use of his arms, so that h 
 may employ them to the very best advantage. 
 
 Packing forms three-fourths of the duty of the trooper i 
 campaign. Do not be astonished, then, at the importance 
 have attached to it since I have commanded you; at the manne 
 in which I have continually insisted that you should appear o 
 parade every day with a regularly and completely packed equip 
 ment. 
 
 There are some things which one never knows well enoug 
 until he knows them too well. 
 
 Whenever in war, either by the death of a horse, or capture 
 from the enemy, you find yourself in possession of extra saddle- 
 trees do not send them to the rear or abandon them on th 
 battlefield, until after you have tried them on the backs of th 
 horses wounded or injured by causes which you recognize as pro 
 ceeding from the shapes of your saddle-trees. I recommend t r 
 you especially, the tree of the Hungarian saddle, the very bes 
 you can have, and one that is durable and adapted to almos 
 every kind of horse. 
 
 Never abandon an equipment until after you have taken fron 
 it everything that may be of use to you, not to make a suppl 
 depot and burden your horse with a useless load, but in order t< 
 replace in the field that which may be wanting, or to exchang 
 what is worthless. Over that let the squadron commanders pr« ; 
 side, and take care that they permit none but useful exchanges 
 
 IS 
 
SHOEING 
 
 In time of war, let the squadron commanders frequently make 
 Unannounced inspections of their equipments and packs. 
 
 The campaign once begun, no horses should be sent to the 
 "l ear, except in case of absolute necessity. The rest which an 
 ^Injury would justify in time of peace ought not to be granted 
 then. In a campaign, an injured horse able to serve ought to 
 iiserve; it is the duty of his rider to cure him while marching. 
 
 si: • • 
 
 Hl I have seen horses, weak and thin, with backs perfectly stripped 
 ;t f>f skin, the means of gaining the cross for their riders. Of this 
 lumber I would mention the one ridden by my friend Guinden, 
 *4vhen he killed the Prince of Prussia, at Saalfeld. 
 
 Unfortunately, in time of war, the light cavalryman has but 
 kittle time to nurse his horse, which would be the means of 
 rreserving his health, but he can always find time enough to 
 ilacken his girths, to pull forward the saddle blanket, to replace 
 lis saddle in its proper position, and he should not negleot to 
 eipmploy it in services of this nature. 
 
 The trooper, ought to live only for his horse which is his 
 egs, his safety, his honor, and his reward. 
 
 A squadron commander ntust devote his attention at all times 
 jio his horses. Everything pertaining to them is a subject for 
 
 inspection, and every moment should be employed In looking 
 ijifter them. The saddlery should receive special attention because 
 i| t often causes the loss of horses and consequent loss of success. 
 _et him bear that constantly in mind. 
 
 The dismounted trooper must be made to understand that if 
 le is ordered to save his equipments it is not for reasons of 
 Economy. The reason Is a nobler and grander one, and founded 
 mtirely on his personal interest. For, if he finds an extra 
 i t# iorse at the rear, being already supplied with an equipment, he 
 ,,/vill be able to reappear immediately in the ranks, and return 
 i f to the battle, where he will obtain the reward of his conduct 
 tnd courage. 
 
 Sometimes, to the disgrace of their regiments, men are seen 
 ihivho deliberately injure their horses so as to have a pretext for 
 iifoncealing their cowardice in the shelter of the small depots. 
 Jrhese accomplish their purpose either by wrinkling their saddle 
 blankets or by placing small pebbles between their folds. If such 
 coundrels can be caught in the act, a terrible example must 
 jjie made of them. 
 
 When a campaign opens, the first care of a chief should 
 J>e to have the mouth-pieces of his curb and snaffle bits tinned 
 r plated; to have all the leather greased instead of waxed, and 
 to keep them so while the war lasts. These two things would 
 elieve the trooper from attending to a multitude of details 
 jh vh ich consume his time uselessly; prevent the horses from he- 
 mming disgusted with rusty bits; relieve the packs of a ridi- 
 ulous number of brushes; and preserve the equipments in good 
 Condition. 
 
 The Chief should see, with his own eyes, that the trooper's 
 l,, iouse-wife contains everything necessary for the repair of his 
 lothing and saddlery. He should also assure himself, by 
 personal inspection, that each squadron possesses a sufficient 
 !t umber of pots, tin canteens and scythes, and that these articles 
 re all suitably packed on the horses. 
 
 l\ SHOEING 
 
 i e A soldier cannot be too oareful of his horse’s feet. A nail 
 '*■ adly driven, a stone caught in the frog, a hard substanoe pushed 
 
 19 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 into the hoof, a shoe pulled off and lost, may, all at once, ren< ^ 
 the horse unfit for field service. 
 
 A troop may, I admit, find itself without a blacksmith. 
 
 So soon as a soldier perceives his horse limping in the slig 
 est degree, he should leave the ranks, dismount, and exams 
 the foot in which the lameness seems to be. 
 
 If the cause of lameness is a stone picked up by the shoe 
 must be removed by striking it with another stone, from 
 narrowest side of the shoe, in order that it may fall more eas 
 from its place. 
 
 If it is a nail, it must be withdrawn by a piece of split wo 
 that will clasp it between its head and the foot, and being turr ,, 
 over, will serve as a lever, and act like pincers; afterward 
 foot must be cleaned out, and a little grease, if it can 
 had, be applied to the hole and left there, until proper treatm< 
 can be obtained. 
 
 Should a soldier hear a shoe clicking or rattling, he shot 
 
 leave the ranks and examine the horse’s foot. If the clicking 
 caused by the loosening of the nails, he must strike them with 
 hammer or stone until the points reappear on the outside of i 
 hoof, when he must clinch them as well as he can until a biai 
 smith can be found. 
 
 If caused by the loss of several nails, he must drive ore. w 
 light blows, into one of the holds made by the former nails, 
 order to avoid all risk of pricking the horse, taking care 
 
 keep the point well forward so that it may come out low ratffi; 
 than high, and to put this nail into that part of the shoe wh 
 has the fewest nails. If the soldier is a new man and afraid 
 try the operation, he should ask an old soldier to render h 
 the service, and afterward take his horse to the first blacksm 
 he can find. 
 
 If the shoe is almost off, so that it would be necessary to c 
 too many nails into it to fasten it, the trooper should take 
 
 off, put it into his shoe pouch and then march on foot, leadi 
 
 his horse by the bridle. 
 
 It is to be well understood that all this is to be done only 
 a distance from the enemy; for when an engagement begins 
 time can be taken for repairing damages; but whether a ho 
 be shod or barefooted, lame or not lame, he must go on, a 
 his rider must not dismount except by order of his captain. 
 
 The more hilly and stony the country is, the more carefu 
 must the trooper attend to the traveling of his horse and 
 any marked change in his gait. 
 
 The file-closers should frequently cast their eyes on the grou 
 passed over by the command. If they see a lost shoe they mi 
 pick it up and restore it to the trooper whose horse has dropp , 
 it. 
 
 A shoe is seldom lost except through the fault of the troop 
 If, before beginning the march, he had examined his horse's fet 
 if, at the different halts, he had inspected them carefully, a 
 called the blacksmith when a nail was found missing, no sho 
 would have been lost. 
 
 Good horse-shoers are rare. The captain should carefu 
 superintend the work at his forge and never hesitate to retu , 
 to the ranks as a trooper one who does his work carelessly, a 
 frequently pricks a horse. 
 
 Blacksmiths are slaves of routine, and they give too "‘t 
 attention to the bearing of the horse. Sometimes they throw t, 
 horse on the point of his foot — which may cause a thousand se 
 ous accidents — and again upon his heel, which fatigues and wer , 
 out the horse rapidly by producing an unnatural action in t , 
 flexor tendons of the leg. A troop commander, entering on 
 campaign, should satisfy himself twenty times rather than one , 
 
 20 
 
THE SABRE 
 
 tiat his men possess everything needed; not only a set of 
 ;tra shoes, but also at least double the number of nails re- 
 ired to set them. 
 
 If the season is advanced, he should see that every man adds 
 his ordinary supply a certain number of roughened nails for 
 e on ice. 
 
 He should also personally see that every extra set of shoes 
 s been fitted to the feet of the horse which is to wear them. 
 So soon as his supply of shoes and nails is exhausted, he should 
 deavor, by all means, to repair his losses, either by setting 
 lC > blacksmith to work so soon as an opportunity occurs, or by 
 ^king the shoes from the horses sent to the rear, or from those 
 led in action. I have always noticed in a campaign that the 
 iop which counted the most horses in the ranks, was the one 
 ose blacksmiths were the best and most carefully watched. 
 
 It is always the fault of the troop commander when the horses 
 s without shoes. 
 
 THE SABRE 
 
 How Is the sabre to be used? 
 
 The sabre is the weapon in which you should repose the 
 satest confidence, for, very rarely will it, by breaking in your 
 (j, ,n d , fail to render good service. Its strokes are sure in pro- 
 tion to the coolness with which you direct them, and control 
 ur weapon. It is the points alone that kill; the others serve 
 yly to wound. Thrust! thrust! as often as you can; you will 
 jrthrow all whom you touch, and demoralize those who escape 
 ur attack, and will add to those advantages that of being al- 
 ys at a parry and never uncovered. In the first wars in Spain 
 ■ dragoons made, with their points, a reputation which demoral- 
 d the English and Spanish troops. 
 
 Q. Should one, in war, attempt to use all the movements 
 iscribed in the regulations? 
 
 A. No; as a general rule never attempt to attack an enemy 
 ept when he is in front of you or at your side; whenever he 
 s in your rear parry with rapid moulinets. 
 
 "3- Which is the most effective cut? 
 
 p. The back-handed stroke. It should be used only upon an 
 
 I ny who passes you, or upon a cuirassier whom it would be 
 uncertain to thrust in the flank. 
 
 |. Where should you strike him? 
 
 At the height of the cravat; because it is natural for a 
 latened trooper to lower his head, and thus, you may strike 
 in the face; if your blow misses its object it may touch his 
 jlder or forearm, and thus disable him. 
 
 ,. First grasp firmly the gripe of the sabre, so that the blade 
 not turn in the hand, and tend to touch with the flat side 
 ead of the edge; then you can cut with a sawing motion, 
 ■h makes the weapon penetrate more deeply 
 ivery cutting edge is a saw, more or less fine, which produces 
 effect in traveling horizontally over the object which it at- 
 <s. To produce this effect at the moment of striking, draw 
 hand backwards. That is the whole secret of the terrible 
 e work of the Mamelukes. 
 
 . What rules should be observed in making thrusts? 
 i. (1) To make sure of the hand; (2) to make a good 
 ice of the point of attack, the flank being the most vulner- 
 s; (3) if the attack be made at a higher point, to hold the 
 sidewise, so that it may penetrate between the ribs; (4) 
 11 drive the point home, and instantly draw back the elbow, 
 ••Hscially if the adversary faces you. I have frequently seen 
 
 21 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 troopers sprain the wrist and become disabled for a whole c ■ 
 paign through having made a thrust unskillfully. Not a diffi 
 thing to understand, since they oppose their single forearmL, 
 a very considerable resistance offered by the weight and im I \ 
 sion of a mounted man. If they had withdrawn the arm I 
 would not have been injured, and might have, in a measure, s' 
 covered themselves either to renew the attack, or to resume 
 parry. As soon as you have delivered a thrust, if the en 
 
 does not surrender, give him the back-handed cut; it was 1 
 that Guindet killed the Prince of Prussia at Saalfeld. 
 
 Q. How should a sabre be sharpened so that it will cut w 11 
 
 A. When a campaign is decided upon the orders ar 
 
 suddenly. Each one hastens to prepare himself in the si i 
 
 time granted him; hence the little care given to sharper 
 sabres — a great mistake, which is always recognized only v> i ■ 
 there is no longer any means of correcting it. 
 
 It is no trifling matter to sharpen the edge of a sabre. n 
 French sabre has a bevel (a fault tolerated by no other pe^ 
 whose cavalry knows how to use the sabre); the greater 
 angle of this bevel the less deeply can the blade penetrate. „ 
 in sharpening the blade, you increase Instead of diminish 
 fault, you render the blade almost useless — a stick would 
 better than your sabre. , 
 
 Remember, then, that the sharper the angle of the bevel, 
 more deeply your sabre will cut. 
 
 Under the Empire the trooper carried no hatchet, so 
 sabre had to replace it for all the work of the bivouac; hence 
 blade and edge were quickly Injured; but the troopers who un 
 stood their business soon corrected this abuse which they 
 been compelled to practice: (1) by making use of the lo i 
 
 part of the blade only, for cutting wood, pickets, eto., 
 
 preserving, as Intact as possible, the upper part, for use In c 
 bat; (2) in always carrying with them a small, mild file, \ 
 whloh to sharpen the blade when It became dulled. 
 
 I advise you to use this kind of a file, or a whetstone, 
 whichever is used, to always work it on the blade from be 
 upwards, taking the guard as a base, so that the impercept ., 
 teeth of your saw may point towards your hand. 
 
 Two things contribute largely to the rapid destruction of 
 edge of a blade: The first is the carelessness with whict „ 
 
 is pushed into the scabbard, or drawn out of it; the seconc r 
 
 the shaking and rubbing of the blade in the scabbard while I 
 there. To remove the first cause, do not drive, so to sp> r 
 your sabre into the scabbard, but return it gently, avoiding . 
 rubbing of the edge. 
 
 The second may be removed by having the wooden ring, wl ... 
 is placed within the scabbard to proteot the blade, so well fi 
 that the blade will be compressed by it and prevented f 
 moving or swaying. 
 
 As moisture is one of the most Injurious things affec 
 sabre blades, beware of returing your sabre without wiping i * 
 
 Not only rain and blood, but even fog, may be the cause 1 
 rust, and the least dampness in the air will fix Itself on 1 
 polished surface and enter the pores of the blade. If the bl“ 
 Is moist when returned to the scabbard the latter also beco 
 damp, and there will be difficulty In drying it. In war ii 
 a wise precaution to always keep your blade well greased. 
 
 If, as a result of hard rains, water enters the scabbard, T 
 descends to the bottom of it, thus becoming a permanent c; * 
 of rust to the point of the sabre, remove the wooden ring f 
 put the empty scabbard In the sun or near a fire; if the lal 3 
 beware of heating It so as to melt the solder, but continue r 
 operation slowly until the moisture has been evaporated. Shi < 
 
 22 
 
DISCIPLINE 
 
 c .ihis prove insufficient, pass the scabbard briskly several times 
 jj through warm ashes. 
 
 n Often a dismounted trooper, who has his sabre in his hand, 
 , .places the point upon the ground. Very naturally the point be- 
 comes rusted and ruined, so that it can no longer be depended 
 /pon In a fight. 
 
 1 Often, In bivouac, a trooper toasts a piece of meat upon the 
 I6 soint of his sabre, by ;which means the temper of the blade is 
 I destroyed, so that he can no longer rely upon it for defence. 
 Seneral rule: Be as careful of the blade of your sabre as you 
 
 #( »re of your razor. 
 
 in. * * 
 
 ^ Q. What should be done with captured arms? 
 
 ln . A. If one has need of them preserve them and send them 
 
 *'0 the rear; should they not be required for use, break them. 
 
 Q. How can you break a sabre? 
 
 A. By placing a blade horizontally on two stones, one end 
 testing on each, then throwing a heavy body upon the unsup- 
 mrted middle, taking care to avoid injury from the flying frag- 
 ments. 
 
 ‘ Q. And a scabbard? 
 
 ' A. In the same manner; although it may not be broken It 
 /vill be unfit for service. 
 
 w DISCIPLINE 
 
 » Q. What is discipline? 
 
 I* 1 ' A. The soul of armies; without discipline there can be no army. 
 
 Q. What is the mainspring of discipline, in iwar? 
 
 «l A. Honor. 
 
 * Q. How is it to be stimulated? 
 
 A. By praise and blame. 
 
 Q. If they do not suffice? 
 
 * A. Then punishments, more severe than those inflicted In 
 ™jeace, must be imposed. 
 
 Q. Why this difference? 
 
 ' A. Because offences committed in war differ from those which 
 nay be committed in garrison. Because they have different con- 
 sequences. Because men who commit themselves, if not re- 
 claimed by a sentiment of honor, receive less consideration than 
 •Cnywhere else. Because the punishments that can be Inflicted 
 1 .re not so numerous nor so finely graduated. Because the more 
 erious consequences offences may have, the more necessary it is 
 l! hat striking examples should be made to the offenders. 
 
 1 In peace, you do not have to punish such offences as abandoning 
 "i post, cruelty, cowardice, etc., and you have, for such offenses 
 , s are committed, the graded punishments of confinement to 
 
 I arracks, the guardhouse, prison, dungeon, disciplinary companies, 
 J tc. At the outposts, nothing of that sort can exist, so that It 
 
 .s necessary, while overlookng mild offenses which, in garrison, 
 m you Id receive punishment, to strike hard when punishment must 
 >e inflicted. 
 
 II Q. How would you grade the punishments to be inflicted? 
 
 A. The reprimand in private; then in front of the troops; 
 
 Jatlgue duty; confinement under charge of the camp guard; to 
 tJ je dismounted for one or several days, and marched with the ad- 
 I ance guard; dismount the trooper and send him back to the army; 
 a | ave him driven out by his peers and handed over to the justice 
 , f the provost marshal; these last two should be inflicted only in 
 jo ase of incorrigibility, mutiny, or cowardice. 
 
 23 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Q. Will blame answer the purpose? 
 
 A. Yes; often, because it is administered publicly, and to me ’ 
 sensible of the gravity of the situation. 
 
 Q. And the rewards? 
 
 A. As a disciplinary force, rewards are much more powerfu 3 
 than punishments. The more prolonged a war is the more thi ‘ 
 force increases; because, hard service having relieved you first o 
 the bad soldiers who take advantage of any pretext to leave 
 then of the mediocrities of no force, there will remain only th ■' 
 flower of your ranks whom honor will control better than fear. ‘ 
 
 Q. What scale of rewards would you establish? 
 
 A. A complimentary word spoken in front of the regiment 
 marks of esteem, repeated as often as occasion offers; the choic 
 of a confidential mission offering a chance for gaining distinction ' 
 approbration expressed in regimental orders; should a worth 
 soldier be dismounted, give to him instead of to any other 
 spare horse; the day of a review call this man out of the ranks an 
 present him to the general; promotion; nomination for admissio 
 into the Legion of Honor. 
 
 The severity of the laws of military discipline should be adaptec 
 as a whole, to the spirit of the people to be governed by them ’’ 
 and in detail, to the character of the provinces furnishing th 
 recruits; to the different characters of those whom you commanc • 
 and to the degree of comfort or privation existing in the army 
 
 The application of these laws is a matter which demands, mor ’ 
 than any other, perhaps, the keenest powers of observation on th 
 part of a commander. .To treat a Frenchman like a Dutchman, t 
 punish one man exactly like another, displays only ignorance o r 
 laziness on the part of authority, and cannot possibly effect an 
 useful purpose. 
 
 In many cases, the application of military law should be mad ** 
 rather according to the enlightened conscience of the juror tha 
 to the strict severity of the judge. 
 
 Discipline is not in itself the end we seek, but a means c • 
 
 securing it; it is not to be obtained by punishment only, for rt r - 
 
 wards pertain to it also; the law should be applied according t 
 the spirit rather than the letter. To accomplish that, the com 
 mander must combine with the constant exercise of observatio 
 the greatest firmness in the execution of the law. 
 
 The basis of all discipline is the study of, and acquaintanc ’ 
 with, the men subject to our orders. Every good officer or nor " 
 commissioned officer should be able to call by heart the roll of hi 
 
 squadron, and give a detailed history of the military lives of hi : 
 
 men. 
 
 0- How do you apply your punishments? 
 
 A. In war every offence should be noted as soon as com * 
 mitted, and the punishment should follow at once. In that wa L 
 the soldiers will be impressed by the example made, and those re , 
 marks and discussions, common companions of insubordination i. 
 which soon degenerate into revolt if not forcibly stopped in th L 
 beginning, will be avoided. 
 
 Shirking is the one vice to be punished before all others; a ' 
 soon as it shows itself, smash it as you would a glass. 
 
 However small the number of men you command there will b! 
 leaders among them. Some of them go straight along the righ i- 
 road, the others turn their backs upon it. Study them bot , 
 constantly, determine their influence, and as soon as an occasio ir 
 presents itself reward the first — for they are precious models— 
 and treat the others severely and without indulgence, for the 
 are the very pests of disorganization. Thus you will depriv 
 them of the moral influence they might otherwise exert, and, i 
 
 24 
 
DISCIPLINE 
 
 hey stir again, you will have to deal with them only, instead of 
 er with a conspiracy. ......... 
 
 I repeat it, a method ;which never fails, and which is the better 
 the higher the grade of the officer who employs it, is to have the 
 u lames of all his men by heart so that he can call each by name, 
 land prove to him publicly and with a few words that he knows 
 , Eim and will not lose sight of him. 
 
 Whatever your rank, never remit a punishment which one of 
 J'our subordinates may order for one of his men; that would end 
 ill discipline. If you find the punishment unjust or too severe, 
 send for the officer who ordered it and privately direct him to 
 ■ emit it. 
 
 I! In France, the soldier desires liberty less than that justice 
 yhich is the right of all, and which allows the balance to be borne 
 Sown by true merit only. Let him suffer like his comrades and he 
 'toes not complain; let him be a little less fortunate than they in 
 Prosperity and he cries out against the injustice; this knowledge 
 JJjf his disposition should teach his commanders how to deal with 
 iim. 
 
 . If discipline does not admit of the principle of equality, the 
 if Prerogative of command should never exceed their just limits. 
 Jin campaign let there be as perfect equality in suffering and 
 Privation as in the chances of being killed. 
 
 'j No officer should wear his cloak if the soldier has not been 
 directed to put on his; to warm himself in a house which 
 P he soldier has been forbidden to enter. 
 
 'J To monopolize for himself or his horses a barn which would 
 (| jhelter his men. 
 
 i To demand for himself an excessive portion of the issues 
 made in bivouac, while the soldier receives what is barely nec- 
 
 essary. 
 
 He should, under all circumstances, defend his men, whether 
 ittacked by the enemy, or insulted or maltreated without reason 
 Jpy another officer of the army, or when issues ordered by the Gen- 
 ral are not made as directed. 
 
 He must protect the sick and wounded, under all circumstances, 
 jjnd, finally, show himself worthy of his epaulettes. 
 
 . Share with the soldier and he will share with you, and you 
 will never be cheated in that market; you shall see, some day, 
 vhen everything fails you, how this old soldier will be proud, 
 jiappy even, to offer you his bread and his life. 
 
 Beware however of thinking that in order to gain the affection 
 f your soldiers, it is necessary to be lax with them, for you will 
 be completely deceived. I have known officers beloved by their 
 ;oldiers, and have studied them for my own instruction; they 
 /ere just, very firm, independent of the inferior cliques which 
 ljt \lways endeavor to monopolize a commander; on the battlefield 
 hey displayed the greatest bravery, and in bivouac, they were 
 igilant, unsparing of themselves as of others, generous with what 
 jhey had, and they spoke a language which the soldier understood; 
 There is the secret of their absolute power, of the fanatical de- 
 otion which they inspired. Under them discipline was in- 
 stinctive; no one ever thought of infringing its rules, but if by 
 hance any one exhibited a disregard of his duties, the justice of 
 iis comrades spared their commander the trouble of punishing 
 iim. Under the command of a man of that temper everything 
 i easy; the regiment becomes a family — a family capable of 
 erforming prodigies. 
 
 Q. What gives the greatest power to the laws of discipline? 
 «y A. The respect which a commander inspires. 
 i« Q. What gives the greatest facility in their application? 
 
 25 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 A. Subordination. 
 
 Q. What assures subordination? 
 
 A. An intimate knowledge of the authority of each militai ' 
 grade. 
 
 Q. What assures to orders their useful effect? 
 
 A. First, the briefness and firmness of the tone in whic 
 they are given; second, inflexibility in their execution. Orde 
 given and supported in that way, are always promptly obeyed. 
 
 Q. What, then, produces well-ordered discipline? 
 
 A. Unity, and promptness of action. 
 
 Q. What produces unity of action? 
 
 A. L’esprit de corps, which, in war, might be more proper 
 called the very life of the regiment. r 
 
 Q. In war should one obey the orders of all officers superir 
 to him in rank? 
 
 A. One should be respectful to every officer, no matter < 
 iwhat arm, who is his superior in rank; but one should obey onl 
 the orders given by his immediate commanders, when they belon 
 to his corps, or when, if not belonging to it, they have been re 
 ognized by his fellow-officers. t: 
 
 Q. What punishment may be inflicted upon an officer? 
 
 A. A private warning; a public reprimand; simple arrest, whic 
 consists in marching in rear of his squadron and being tempo - 
 arily deprived of command. 
 
 Close arrest, which consists in being deprived of sword an 
 command, being placed in charge of the camp guard, and bein i 
 compelled to march In front of the trumpets when the reglmer 
 is en route. 
 
 Being published in regimental and brigade orders. 
 
 Being sent to the rear. 
 
 Dismissal by court-martial. 
 
 Expulsion from the regiment by his peers. 
 
 0- Should a regimental commander use all these punishment ’ 
 on his officers. 
 
 A. The commander of a regiment who is obliged to make us - 
 of them is the guilty one, and above all punishable; it depend 
 upon him to prevent offences among officers, by raising at th 
 very outset the pitch of their honorable sentiments, their pe 
 sonal dignity, to a height worthy of their position. 
 
 If, by the most extraordinary chance, there should be foun 
 among the officers one deaf to this law of conscience, who wi : 
 not understand the nobly paternal language of his commande r 
 he should be unhesitatingly excluded from the ranks of th 
 combatant force, either by sending him to the rear to comman 
 a small depot, or by subjecting him to the justioe of his peers 
 Whose unanimous judgments, always just, never fail of confii ’ 
 mation by the superior authority. 
 
 0- You recognize, then, in the corps of officers, noncommls r 
 sioned officers, and soldiers the right of trying one of the> 
 members? 
 
 A. I recognize in every corps whose mainspring Is honor, th 
 right of preserving that honor unsullied, and of chasing from it 
 ranks any one of its members who compromises it. Only. I d< ' 
 mand that these judgments be unanimous. The tribunal of th 
 whole number is infallible; it is a second conscience. 
 
 THE STUDY OF THE TERRAIN 
 Drawing and Topography. 
 
 terrains of war are of two kinds — practicable and nn 
 practicable. Their study should be directed to three prlncipi 
 
 26 
 
THE STUDY OF THE TERRAIN 
 
 points; 1st, their nature, whether easy or difficult, with special 
 Preference to the manoeuvring of the different arms; 2nd, their 
 position, with reference to offensive and defensive operations; 
 3d, their development and distances, 
 it | Q. What is a defile? 
 
 ir A. Every passage which, by contracting the way, diminishes 
 the front of troops in line or column. 
 
 Q. What is a plateau? 
 
 A. The summit of a mountain, on which position may be taken. 
 
 Q. What is a crest? .... 
 
 flj A. A mountain top on which a position cannot be taken, 
 
 militarily speaking. 
 
 ioi Q. What are declivities of a mountain? 
 
 A. Its opposite slopes, 
 o Q. What is a causeway? 
 
 ill A. A road raised above the surface of impassable ground. 
 
 «lj Q. What is a position? 
 
 ec A. Ground iwhich offers to troops the means of fighting with 
 advantage, even with inferior forces (Jacquinot de Presles). 
 
 Q. What is the best offensive position? 
 lolj A. That which is the most threatening to the enemy, and 
 
 ii most favorable for our attack upon him. 
 
 Q. What is the best defensive position? 
 hi A. That which offers the greatest number of impassible ob- 
 :«l stacks to the attacks of the enemy. 
 
 Si Q. Is it indispensable for a light cavalry officer to know how 
 to sketch? 
 
 A. As indispensable as to know how to write. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because, often with two lines he can say more and say 
 it better than in two pages of writing; because a few pencil 
 ii marks can be made more quiokly and iwith less trouble than a 
 report can be written; because they preserve and classify the de- 
 ls tails of a report much better than can be done by the mere 
 
 id I recollections of a long reconnaissance. 
 
 [hi Q. Does not sketching offer still other advantages? 
 
 (i A. Yes, an infinite number for military purposes; it ac- 
 
 customs one to observe and see clearly, to appreciate distances, 
 inn the nature of the ground, to recall again to the mind what has 
 
 ill; been observed, and especially to estimate the possibility, rapidity 
 
 ti and fitness of proposed operations. 
 
 Uin Q. Are there yet others? 
 
 ml A. Yes, for the distinguished officer — that of givng great 
 
 in facility in judging the positions, the moral impressions, of the 
 [| fl men he commands. 
 
 Q. An example of personal local recollection will make the 
 
 ,| t matter plainer. 
 
 il A. The enemy is some leagues distant; an officer sets out to 
 reconnoitre him. He observes very carefully the road he travels, 
 Dul for, in case of attack in front, it will be the most direct by which 
 II to return; but, at the same time, he bears carefully in mind the 
 roads, paths, the practicable ground upon the flanks which 
 
 Hu join the road he passes over, in order that, if cut off in his re- 
 treat, he may profit by his knowledge of them to thwart the 
 
 manoeuvers of the enemy, and by making a deto'..' return to his 
 support at the point of departure. 
 
 Before him is a bare and level plain. There are two villages close 
 together, and they have almost the same appearance, but the 
 church spire of one is pointed, the other rounded at its summit, 
 I* and it is upon the former that he directs his march. He comes 
 Pi to a wood where there are two reads of equal width opening 
 
 27 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 upon a copse of symmetrical form. There is a boundary stone 
 upon the right of the one he must follow; he advances, crosses 
 a pool, and reaches a quincunx. Six similar roads meet there. 
 On the right of that which he leaves is a tall, dead tree; on the 
 left of the one he is to take is a post. He continues his march; 
 a clearing appears on his right; the wood becomes thicker and 
 thicker; still he goes on until an open stile appears in front of 
 him; at the side of it is a clump of broom plants in flower, a 
 deep ditch, newly dug, a pile of broken stones, and a tall, soli- 
 tary poplar tree. On coming out of the wood he finds himself 
 again on an open plain. After he has marched for ten minutes 
 the enemy appears in force and compels his prompt retreat. The 
 guide takes advantage of the moment of surprise to make his 
 escape. The officer commanding the reconnaissance is dependent 
 upon his recollection of the forms and outlines of the objects 
 passed in coming, which will be made all the more vivid by the 
 habit of sketching, which has engraved them on his memory; 
 and the practice of frequently looking behind him has enabled 
 him to recognize them under their two aspects. 
 
 He knows that in returning he will find on his right those 
 which were on his left, and on his left, those which were on his 
 right. The poplar, the pile of broken stones, the newly-dug 
 ditch, the clump of green and yellow broom plants, then the open 
 stile, then the dark wood, then the post, then the tall dead tree, 
 then the pool, then the boundary stone, then the pointed spire, are 
 the markers which guide him back to camp. 
 
 The habit of sketching gives to the memory a power which 
 might be well called instinctive — that of seizing, in spite of one's 
 self, and without being distracted by other thoughts, upon the 
 form and color of the objects which present themselves before 
 him. The first example is based simply upon the outlnes of 
 objects. I shall now give you one where the colors will serve 
 as well as their silhouettes. 
 
 A partisan at the head of a hundred troopers, leaves his 
 bivouac at the break of day. He is in an open plain, and desires 
 to conceal his march from the enemy. A black, thin line ap- 
 pears on his right; can it be the enemy? That would certainly 
 be astonishing, for reconnaisance made in this direction during the 
 night have not encountered him. In the first place, the front of 
 this line is not placed in a proper manner, as it in no place faces 
 our troops. Let us see. The line does not budge. Is it infantry 
 or cavalry in line? No, for the line is not cut by regular intervals 
 of equal width, and besides, the upper part, although nearly 
 parallel to the lower, is, nevertheless, notched. Can it be a 
 wood? No; the line is too thin. What is it then. Simply a 
 hedge. It is long, continuous and high enough to conceal a 
 column of troops. He marches to it, skirts along it. keeping it 
 between him and the enemy. On reaching the end of it, he sees 
 at half a league's distance a village whose name the guide gives 
 him, and which lies upon the road he is to follow, but he cannot 
 reach it without being perceived. He halts, and observes that the 
 mists raised by the sun are more dense and heavy on his right, 
 and are prolonged in a winding course towards the village. Their 
 gray outline becomes thinner every moment, and extends par- 
 allel and pretty close to the right flank of his column. He decides 
 that it can be produced only by the presence of a small stream 
 running in the bottom of a valley. 
 
 He turns off directly to the right, marches perpendicularly upon 
 it so as to mask his movement by the hedge he is leaving, and 
 arrives in the bottom, turns to the left, follows the stream, and 
 Cains the village. 
 
 28 
 
THE STUDY OF THE TERRAIN 
 
 i After having skirted along some orchards for a quarter of an 
 , hour, the plain is again in sight. To the left a thin line, white 
 and short, disappears in the green and brown tints of the plain, 
 and reappears again a league farther on. It is the road A-B 
 j which he is to travel, but the question is. What direction does 
 f it follow between the two points where it is visible? A moving 
 i wagon by the dust it raises in its course, will show him. He 
 . observes carefully the course pursued by the vehicle, and after it 
 
 I has passed beyond the point which it is especially desirable to 
 
 i know, he moves toward it and takes the road. 
 
 , He descends the hill, and discovers in the distance a iwood. 
 
 ■ He observes it attentivly, and perceives that its right side differs 
 [ in color from the left. The first is a dark green mingled with 
 i bluish tints; the second is generally of a paler green; its 
 , shadows are not so deep, and here and there they are interrupted 
 by white tree-trunks. He does not hesitate to march towards the 
 j left side of the wood, which is evidently planted with acacias and 
 birches which only grow upon poor, dry and firm soils, easy to 
 travel over; while the right side is composed of alders and willows, 
 
 ' which always indicate marshy and impracticable ground. 
 
 1 He reaches the mountain covered with fir-trees, goes on, and 
 1 all at once the dark-green forest becomes thinner, and permits 
 
 1 him to see through the trees a tint of paler green bordering upon 
 1 a blue; there is without a doubt, the location of the ravine of X, 
 
 1 at the bottom of which runs the torrent of Q. He turns to the 
 left and sees the plain again. 
 
 i The more undefined the color of the horizon, and the more it 
 i merges into that of the sky, the more distant it is; the more 
 clearly it is defined and stands out from the color of the sky, 
 and harmonizes with that of the foreground, the nearer it is. 
 
 This observation is the basis of all aerial perspective. We 
 i should accustom our eyes and our judgment to make with cer- 
 tainty, and to rectify, the estimates which this perspective indi- 
 cates to us. It may be easily done on every march, for nothing 
 is simpler than to estimate the distance from the point where 
 one may be, to any point whatever towards which he marches, 
 then to regulate the speed of his march; on arriving, one can 
 tell by consulting his watch whether his estimate is correct or not. 
 
 The air is blue, therefore the greater its mass between you 
 and any point whatever, the more that point will partake of the 
 blue of the sky. With a little attention in making comparisons, 
 with practice, taking as a base the general scale of gradations 
 of light and shade, in going from any point where he may be, to 
 the horizon, he may calculate surely and promptly the whole and 
 intermediate distances. 
 
 I The partisan quits the wood and descends into the plain. The 
 enemy surprises and attacks him, seizes upon the road by which 
 he came, and forces him to take to some meadows on his left. 
 These meadows are green, but to the left their color is almost 
 blue, and willows grow on their borders, to the right, on the con- 
 i trary, they are of a deep green. The partisan withdraws rapidly 
 to the right, for he knows that when the green of a meadow has 
 a bluish tint, it is because the meadows contain rushes, which 
 always indicate the presence of water, or turfy ground, from which 
 it would be difficult, perhaps, to extricate his horses, if once 
 mired in them; while meadows of a deep-green color are evidence 
 )f firm, dry ground. Continuing, he skirts the bank of a stream 
 which appears to be deep, and over which no bridge is to be seen 
 All at once a broad track is seen to cut the turf which borders 
 the stream, appears again upon the other side, running perpen- 
 dicularly to the course of the water. It is certainly a road, 
 ind must indicate a ford. In fact, he tries it confidently, for 
 
 29 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 the water is not so green at this spot. The brown, pebbl 
 bottom can be seen, and determines his route. Once separate, 
 from the enemy by this obstacle, judging that having bee ; 
 discovered, his expedition can no longer hope to succeed, an. I 
 
 that the chances of loss are more numerous than those o ' 
 success, he makes a detour, and consulting the course of tb 
 sun, and the successive indications which his memory of tlv 
 locality recalls to him, he returns to camp. 
 
 Q. Should a light-cavalry officer then learn to sketch I | 
 order to observe well, and take a course of topography? 
 
 A. It is indispensable, if he wishes to become a distir , 
 guished officer. I believe that this course should even err 
 brace some knowledge of colored aerial perspective. In cu 
 tivating his talent for topographical drawing, the officer wi 
 find numerous opportunities of being extremely useful to th i 
 generals of the advanced guard, and of making a reputatlo 
 whioh will hasten his well-deserved advancement. 
 
 Q. But this course would be a long one, and impractloablj 
 in the present state of affairs. 
 
 A. That is why one should limit himself to acquiring , r 
 ready knowledge of certain conventional signs whch may b - 
 lodged in his memory in a few days, be easily found at thj 
 
 end of his pencil, and whose employment would be eminentll- 
 
 useful in strengthening his reports of reconnaissance. 
 
 Q. What is topography, properly so called. 
 
 A. It is the basis of all military operations. Its stud 
 
 cannot be too thorough. Whatever knowledge one may hav|.\ 
 acquired of the enemy, whatever force he may have at hi! 
 disposal, every enterprise, no matter what its nature, depenol.: 
 for its execution upon a knowledge of the terrain. (L.R.A. 1 
 
 Q. Should a light-cavalry officer put entire confidence i| 
 the maps furnished him? 
 
 A. No; he should consider them rather as useful guide! 
 than as actual reproductions of existing conditions. He shoulj 
 never fail to correct the errors which may have slipped int 
 his maps, and to add the useful details which they do nci 
 
 give. He must remember that the older the map, the let, 
 exact it is; for, often in a few years, villages disappear 
 
 others are joined and take new names, roads change the . 
 
 direction, streams have their courses modified, ponds are draine 1 ’ 
 and devoted to agriculture, fords are replaced by bridges, bridg. 
 are taken down and rebuilt at more distant points, lane!, 
 
 become covered with forests, with heather, with marshe:!! 
 
 fields, vineyards, meadows, interchange their uses, and, co 
 sequently, their topographical features. It should be also r 
 membered that the small scale upon which most maps a 
 constructed must often entail errors. So, I repeat, an office, 
 
 should consider the maps sent to him as very useful guide Z. 
 especially as to the direction of his march, but entire coi 
 fidence should not be reposed in their details. 
 
 Q. Indicate the conventional topographical signs which yc 
 say are easy to make and remember. 
 
 A. I shall do so, by first tracing the signs separate!; 
 then by collecting them in a general example, which will i ; 
 employed in the chapters on Reoonnaissances and Report . 
 An officer should have a large sheet of paper in order i r 
 trace, according to scale, the plan of his march. This pla - 
 can almost always be drawn to a scale which should not be t< ■ 
 small, because it will be possible to dismount whenever ar 
 sketching is to be done. He can even do his sketching whi. 
 mounted, if the sheet be folded beforehand, in a convenlei . 
 manner, so that it can be brought under the pencil succ$ r . 
 
 30 
 
OBSERVATION 
 
 sively and partially, as needed, and that the paper already 
 used be folded back gradually and successively, so as to be 
 ■eplaced by clean paper drawn out; but the small leaves of a 
 rocket-book will suffice if care be taken to follow them in 
 ■egular order, page by page, always beginning at the top or 
 bottom the drawing of the plan. It is upon leaves of these 
 
 limensions — those of a pocketbook — that I give you the second 
 jxample asked for. 
 
 Q. What care should be taken in drawing the plans? 
 
 A. 1. In beginning them, to have the scale so small that 
 i single leaf will represent quite a large extent of country. 
 
 2. To draw very fine lines, so as not to confuse those which 
 Trust be drawn parallel, but indicate different things. 
 
 3. To give particular attention to the spelling of proper names. 
 
 4. To go over the whole with pen and ink, when there is time 
 lo do so, to prevent the map being rubbed out. 
 
 5. To give distances corretly, by writing beside those re- 
 rted, or said to be so and ,o, by the inhabitants, the time 
 
 which it took to march over them; for example, from one point 
 -f interest to another one would write one league (one hour at 
 the walk), two leagues (two hours at the trot). 
 
 In comparing the plans I have given you, with the topographical 
 drawings you have seen, you will find the former very coarsely 
 drawn, without doubt; that is just what I wish: by simplifying 
 the example the copying is made easy. My object is not to make 
 draughtsmen of you, but rather to put, in the course of a few 
 lays, at your fingers’ ends, the useful signs of a language new 
 o the most of you — signs which will not disgust you by the 
 lifficulty of reproducing them, and of which you will be able to 
 nake immediate use. 
 
 INDICATIONS. 
 
 Q. What means are there of learning the movements of the 
 nemy ? 
 
 ,, A. Four. 1st, reports of prisoners, deserters, and travellers; 
 1! ™"d, reports of spies; 3rd, reconnaissances; 4th, indications. 
 
 Q. What enables you to draw inferences from indications? 
 
 A. A knowledge of the general customs of war, and of the 
 eculiarities of the enemy. It can be done only by practising 
 onstantly the closest observation. Indications are general or 
 pecial, 
 
 0- Designate the general indications. 
 
 A. If it is learned that shoes have been distributed in the 
 antonments, that the troops are cleaning their arms, that draught 
 nimals have been collected, those are infallible signs of some 
 ind of movement. To learn that great quantities of supplies 
 ave arrived, that new uniforms have appeared in the bivouacs, 
 proof that new troops are going to join the old ones to unite 
 rith them in an attack very soon; for It is probable that the new 
 niforms are those of a headquarters staff, or billeting officers, 
 hould provisions be collected at a particular place it is proof 
 hat troops are to occupy it. If boats are brought from a dis- 
 ance, and collected in large numbers on the banks of a stream, 
 'llJt is evidence of an approaching attempt at crossing; if they are 
 “urned, it is evidence of an undisguised retreat. If timbers are 
 jollected upon the bank of a stream where there are no boats, 
 Ms also an indication of an attempt at crossing. If important 
 ridges are burned, it is an indication of a long retreat. If, at 
 >me leagues above a bridge which you have just constructed, large 
 
 31 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 boats, heavily laden with stone, are discovered, it is an indicati 
 of an attempt to destroy your work, which you can prevent 01 
 by getting in front of them to ground, secure or sink them, 
 poles tarred and covered with straw, are placed at intervals alo 
 the enemy’s line, it is an indication of a signal for a general mo 
 ment. If ladders are collected in bivouac, it is an indication 
 an intended attack upon a fortified place. 
 
 If, on the battlefield, the enemy conceals his movements, a r 
 masses his troops in deep and heavy columns of squadrons, it 
 an indication of an overwheming attack. If he deploys, he ^ 
 taking up a position. If, in deploying, and in first line, he r , 
 sembles numerous columns upon a particular point, it is an v 
 dication of the idea which will govern all his future movemen * 
 for without a doubt that point is considered a strategical o 
 If the artillery makes a retrograde movement, it is an indicati 
 of retreat. If the hospitals and small depots are moved fartf ' n 
 to the rear, it is an indication of a retreat or change of fro s 
 
 If the bivouac fires of the enemy appear to be much me - 
 numerous but smaller than usual, and purposely placed so as ic 
 make them distinctly visible, if they are lighted successively, a * 
 promptly extinguished after having been lighted, it is an indi* z 
 tion of weakness and retreat. If the enemy’s cavalry, in retre * 
 without being vigorously pressed, hastily withdraws its line * 
 skirmishers, it is either an indication of fear caused by the pre c . 
 imity of a defile, and dread of an attack, or an indication of ( 
 ambuscade into which it desires to draw the pursuers. If t . 
 enemy attacks at break of day, it is an indication that l,. 
 
 movements will be general, and that he will need the wh< r; 
 day either to follow up his advantages or to make good his retre 
 An attack made in the evening is an indication that the or > 
 object of the movement is to make a reconnaissance or to co' | r 
 a retreat; the reality of this second movement may be me c 
 correctly determined if it be executed by the cavalry only, 
 the reconnaissance be energetically executed, and the enei r 
 remains for the night in front of the opening of a defile, it * 
 dicates a vigorous attack on the following day. If on the cc * 
 trary, he retires and resumes his position, it indicates either a i 
 treat, as I said before, or a desire to attract attention to 
 particular point, and to make us less vigilant in regard to othe fc 
 The traces of footsteps are not only an indication of t l : 
 
 direction taken by a column, but also of its strength, and ev r 
 of the leading idea controlling its march. If the ground be beat "• 
 down evenly, the column is composed of infantry only; if ho ir 
 tracks are visible, cavalry formed a part of it; deep and wi k r 
 wheel-tracks would indicate that the troops were accompani * 
 by artillery. The numbers of each arm were in proportion 
 
 the number of well-defined impressions left by it. If the trac ^ 
 be fresh, the column passed not long before: if they have lit s 
 width, the troops were marching without fear of attack, and * 
 route column; if broad they feared an attack, for they wi k 
 marching by platoon or squadron and preoared to deploy. ‘ _ 
 the grain, and the ground on the sides of the road are tramp 
 down and show wide and numerous traces of moving bodies, 1 r 
 cavalry was marching on the flanks, by squadrons, and in echel* B 
 Behind the bridge, in a ravine, near a village, the footprints * 
 show whether the enemy has formed up, whether he has been . 
 the lookout. The fires will serve as a check in estimating 1 ' 
 
 force indicated by the footprints, also the time which has elaps 
 
 6inc . e . the enemy left his bivouac; the quantity of ashes • 
 
 maining, the care he had time to give to the construction 1 
 shelters, the remains of straw, fragments of vessels, entrails 
 
 32 
 
OBSERVATION 
 
 nimals slaughtered, will show still better how long he remained 
 1 it. 
 
 Pieces of clothing, saddlery, equipments, abandoned arms, cart- 
 idges thrown away, dead horses, blood stained clothing, hidden 
 raves, and the care taken in digging them, are all valuable means 
 arriving at a knowledge of the regiments composing the 
 iclumns; of their fatigue and discouragement, of the number 
 wounded carried away with them, of the gravity of their 
 grounds, and of the rank of the officers lost. 
 
 The dust raised by the march of a column indicates not cnly 
 :s direction, but also its strength, its order, and the kinds of 
 oops composing it. The greater or less density, height, and 
 nobility of the cloud will show whether made by cavalry or 
 fantry. 
 
 If the reflection of the arms is very bright, it is probable that 
 tie enemy is facing you, if otherwise, that he has his back to- 
 wards you. If the hostile troops are very far away, and you wish 
 ,n fj knoiw in what direction they are marching, take two fixed points 
 i front of them and on one of their flanks; then you can easily 
 jdge by their passage over successive distances, which separate 
 ihem from these points, their direction, and even their rate of 
 larching. 
 
 iJ f The excitement or insolence of the inhabitants of an insurgent 
 juntry is a sure indication of the approach of the enemy and the 
 '•eoples confidence in his success. 
 
 Q. Name some special indications. 
 
 A. Since, today, fifteen years of peace have removed the 
 ^ontiers, that communication between different nations is frequent 
 nd easy, that the sciences in their latest developments are com- 
 mon to all, the special indications in war are less numerous, because 
 ney belong, on the one hand, to a people which has lost its 
 istinguishing characteristics, and, on the other, to a science which 
 as no longer secrets for any one. However, certain differences 
 o still exist, which I shall endeavor to specialize, while pointing 
 i")ut the amount or degree of confidence which should or should 
 ot be placed in them. 
 
 The Russians, trusting to their numerous and excellent irregular 
 ravalry, take few precautions for safety behind the line which 
 forms in advance of their army; hence, if you can turn their 
 wbossacks and conceal yourself from their lynx eyes (which is not 
 Ifasily done), it is more than probable that you will succeed in 
 isny surprise you may undertake against their regiments of the 
 4ne. The vigilance of the Cossacks is then no sign of the 
 lertness of the other troops of the Russian army. The numerous 
 w|i firmishers which the Cossacks put out in their front are no cer- 
 tain indication of the forces which they cover. The Cossacks, 
 odel light cavalry as they are, true to the real object of their 
 ■ganization, always making war in open order, keep but small 
 iserves; while other European troops may be counted, so to speak, 
 y the number of their skirmishers; a squadron deployed as 
 kirmishers indicating as a rule in the regular armies of Europe, 
 force of at least five or six squadrons behind it. 
 
 Experience in war makes it easy to recognize, at great dis- 
 inces, the nationality of the troops opposed to you; the more or 
 ss perfect alignment, the form of the columns, give to experi- 
 rced eyes almost certain indications, even today, notwithstanding 
 fact that almost all northern armies have adopted the gray 
 loak and low shako. If the troops do not wear their cloaks it 
 still easier to distinguish between them. The colors adopted 
 ^Jith few exceptions, by the continental nations are: Russia, green; 
 ngland. red; Austria, white; Prussia, Spain, Wurtemberg and 
 ie small German States, dark blue; Bavaria, sky blue. Add to 
 
 33 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 that the tints of their accoutrements, the colors of their trouse 
 heights of their shakos, the forms of their masses, and there « F 
 be no uncertainty. 
 
 The Cossacks are the best light cavalry in Europe, the one whi 
 most fully accomplishes the object for which it is maintain 1 
 (which should be that of all light cavalry). That is due 
 their possessing the combined instincts of the wolf and the fi ‘ 
 their habit of making war, their fine physical condition, and t ‘ 
 strength of their horses. 
 
 After the Cossacks come the Poles, certain Prussian and Hi 
 garian regiments, the French, the Belgians, the Bavarians, I ' 
 WurtemLergers, the Saxons, the Germans of the Rhine, I 
 English, the Peitmontese, the Spaniards, and the Dutch. We ■ 
 not so skillful as brave, which is owing to a number of conditic ; 
 easily pointed out and still more easily corrected; but bravi '■ 
 is a great weight in the balance of war, and only too of) 
 charged with the duty of saving the day or driving home a succe 
 
 The nations who have a good and numerous cavalry constan 
 harass the hostile army, which they sometimes succeed in ■; 
 moralizing, and, on the field of battle, threaten their artillery w 
 captuie; one must then modify his tactics to suit theirs, a , 
 have no hard-and-fast general rules of war which would only se 
 to keep him moving slavishly in a disadvantageous rut. For tf 
 reason one should fully understand with whom he has to deal. 
 
 If the Cossacks attack at night it is to prevent your sleepir J. 
 to exhaust you by sleeplessness rather than to break throe r j 
 your lines; generally to show a bold front to them is all tl 
 is necessary to hold them in check. If attacked at night i 
 Prussian cavalry it is a more serious affair, and it is not o ., 
 necessary to be ready to receive them, but also be prepared r 
 manoeuvre against them. Whenever the Austrian Cavalry ma - 
 a night attack you are safe in assuming that it is supported 
 infantry. 
 
 If, in the daytime, the Cossacks show themselves in force ur , 
 one of your wings, but without artillery, it is probable that tl 
 are not supported; if they have guns, it is more than likely t r 
 they are strongly supported, and it will not be long before tl 
 prove it to you by the rapidity of their attack, outflanking y . 
 wings and threatening your lines of retreat. If the Prussian cava 
 shows any artillery of small calibre, by pressing them clos • 
 you will be able to captue it. The calibre of the artillery fir 
 upon you is a certain indication of the kind and strength of 
 troops which it accompanies. 
 
 The laws of morale and of military discipline are different n 
 every country, especially in regard to the relations of soldiers 
 the inhabitants of the country occupied by the hostile troo 
 What among Frenchmen would be called leaviig camp with 
 permission, and pillaging, with tlie people of the north is sim 
 foraging. The appearance then of Cossacks, Prussians, or H 
 garians in a village must not lead one to believe that they h . 
 come there to reconnoitre. No; they are probably there only s, 
 pillage: so keeo on your guard, but draw no absolute com t 
 sions from their appearance at that place. 
 
 If frequent Russian and Prussian patrols take the same road 
 several successive days, and especially if their armies remain i 
 the same position for some time, it is an indication of movem 
 towards the place reconnoitred. 
 
 If the English cavalry knew anything about war, on a bat 
 field they would perhaps be the most terrible cavalry in Euro ■ 
 
 their wellknown luxury in horses and equipments is in harm • 
 
 with the beauty and courage of their soldiers: when they sf 1 
 
 themselves you may be sure that their movements will be unii . 
 
 their attack powerful, and their retreat orderly. They are selc 
 
 34 
 
GUIDES 
 
 Jparated from their infantry, which assures their repose in bivouac 
 ley learn more of the position and dispositions of the enemy 
 , 1 , rough spies, whom they pay handsomely, than through rec- 
 1( inaissances. If you learn that they are separated from their 
 fantry, do not hesitate to attack them by night. When you 
 ( 0 large, make a change of front and attack them in flank. This 
 t anoeuvre can always be successfully practised against any enemy 
 <e the English, who make a vigorous and disunited charge, whose 
 l„irses are not very manageable, and whose men, brave but unin- 
 t ructed, begin their charges too far away from the enemy. 
 
 , If the Cossacks, in their retreat, keep breaking up more and 
 L ore the longer you pursue them, do not infer from that that 
 i,.iey have lost confidence and courage, it is their way of retreat- 
 ,, g, and a very dangerous one for their pursuers, who may very 
 H ten have good reason to repent of their boldness. If, on the 
 jjntrary, other European troops do not rally promptly in retreat 
 is proof of demoralization, and they must then be vigorously 
 Jshed. 
 
 ■ Q. Because the northern infantry has been charged and run 
 er, is it therefore in your power? 
 
 A. The Austrian infantry throw down their arms, and every 
 i. ldier claims to be a Pole; they will faithfully follow you as 
 
 “isoners. The Prussian infantry throw down their arms, but take 
 . em again promptly if they perceive help coming.. .The Russian 
 “fantry lie down, allow the charge to pass, rise and make 
 
 “newed use of their arms. The Austrian skirmishers, clothed 
 tf gray, and armed with carbines using forced balls, are lost 
 
 you press then in the open; do not hesitate to charge them; 
 •'ey are yours, for they will not have time to reload their 
 
 “ rbines. 
 
 “ The truth can be approximately arrived at in calculations 
 * the strength of the enemy's force by the number of his 
 
 vouac fires, by knowing iin advance that each fire represents so 
 “•any men, more or less, according to the nationalities of the 
 
 ftbops in bivouac. . .This difference is owing, above all, to very 
 ttstinct national characteristics, and also to the kind of cooking 
 ttensils with which the troops are provided. As a French 
 
 yivouac fire would indicate an average of ten men, so a Russian 
 <iiuld indicate four; a Dutch, five; an English, six; the Austrian 
 K'd German, six each. 
 
 iriilt is to be understood that these calculations are only approx- 
 bate, and the brightness of the fire, indicating a greater or 
 
 ;s number of men to feed it, gives the most reliable of all 
 it ta. 
 
 GUIDES 
 
 itii 
 
 ™Q. When should guides be employed? 
 
 I*IA. Whenever one is not perfectly acquainted with the 
 
 l> mtry in which he is operating, and especially when it is 
 
 it ssible to mount the guides, so that the rate of travel will 
 
 t be reduced to that of a pedestrian. 
 
 1 Q. Should guides be changed? 
 
 ii A. So long as they are familiar with the country they should 
 tin retained while the expedition lasts, especially if it is a 
 
 icate one. 
 
 jll!Q. What should be done if, on an important expedition 
 
 roijir guide find himself in a country which he does not know? 
 in A. Take another, but keep the first one until the end of 
 
 si expedition, so that he may not betray the object of the march, 
 nilfc. What precautions should be taken with a guide? 
 
 ,|<||A. Their strictness should depend upon the greater or 
 
 s importance of the expedition. The guide employed, either 
 
 36 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 r i 
 
 l : 
 
 in peace or war, for work in rear of the lines of operatio 
 should be allowed to march freely, and at the head of your colun 
 
 Q. And the guide iwho leads a reconnaissance? 
 
 A. He should march near the commanding officer, urn 
 the special guard of a sergeant and a corporal of cavalry, * 
 will watch him constantly. 
 
 It must not be forgotten that, in a hostile country especial 
 a guide will always try to escape from you if he can do 
 easily and without danger. 
 
 Q. If the guide is dismounted, what should be done? 
 
 A. Fasten to his left arm a long forage rope, the ot 
 end of which should be attached to the pommel of the corpor; *, 
 saddle; the sergeant, sabre in hand, and with uncovered holstt , 
 marches by his side. 
 
 Q. If the guide is mounted, what then? 
 
 A. Fasten one of his legs to the stirrup leather, so that 
 difficult ground he cannot leap from the saddle and escaX. 
 then give his bridle rein to the corporal, who marches on 
 left and leads him thus while the expedition lasts. 
 
 Q. Should the face of the guide suddenly show signs 
 excitement? 
 
 A. Warn him that if he proves treacherous he will be 
 stantly shot. 
 
 Q. If it is feared that he is leading the command into 
 ambush? 
 
 A. Impress upon him the fact that in marching at the he 
 of the column, if it should be attacked, he would be the f; 
 one killed. 
 
 Q. Why employ two men to guard a guide already so clos . 
 watched ? 
 
 A. Because the country traversed will often be difficult, i 
 in marching in single file the guide should be both precei 
 and followed. 
 
 Q. Should the guide be allowed to march on a path runn 
 beside the road travelled by the column? 
 
 A. Generally he should be compelled to march with 
 column, especially if the country is broken, or the road 
 along the edges of woods, ravines, large ditches, etc. 
 
 Q. Should the charge of the guide be entrusted to any n 
 commissioned officer that may be available? 
 
 A. No; but only to one of the most intelligent, who m 
 constantly observe the countenance of the guide. 
 
 Q. Should conversation with the guide be permitted? 
 
 A. No; allow no one to question him or to answer 
 questions except those whom you specially select to communic 
 with him; these should be selected from those best acquain 
 with the language of the country, and known to be discreet. 
 
 Q. On an important expedition, would you question your gi 
 in the presence of your detachment? 
 
 A. No; privately. 
 
 Q. How should a guide be questioned? 
 
 A. Very slowly, and while keeping him under the clos 
 scrutiny. If he does not fully understand the questions addre 
 to him, be patient, and change them so as to receive ansv 
 which will be of some use. 
 
 Q. How should a guide be treated? 
 
 A. Very kindly. Let him want for nothing; and if, on y 
 return, you are satisfied with him, and can do him a service, 
 pay him, do not neglect to do so. Often in the enemy’s cour 
 peasants, in order to avoid serving as guides, deny all kne 
 edge of the roads. Be not deceived by this lying but frigt 
 and take along with you thesq pretended Ignoramuses 
 hold them until more useful guides can be procured. 
 
 36 
 
BIVOUACS 
 
 BIVOUACS 
 
 n the chapter on charges I said that seasonablene»s was 
 very genius of war, and in this I repeat the remark. To 
 ,ze the right moment for sleeping is as difficult as to seize 
 * proper one for attacking. The whole mechanics of war is 
 ted to two things, — fighting and sleeping, — expending and 
 airing one's strength. To preserve the indispensible equilibrium 
 this balance is a science. Often it requires more skill to 
 vide troops with strength than to expend it. In presence of 
 enemy the science of resting their troops is one which but 
 officers possess. Nothing denotes a military coup d’oeil more 
 "je prompt, skilful, and thorough. 
 
 ?fo select a bivouac is to take up a military position. To 
 2P in it, to find one’s self mounted in it after having been 
 led and refreshed, prepared to undertake anything when the 
 my advances to the attack is to know one’s enemy thoroughly-to 
 w him by heart. To oppose rested and refreshed troops to 
 ®diers, weakened and dispirited by privations and fatigues, 
 'lo possess the advantage over them and to have all the chances 
 success in one’s favor. If you add to this talent- the fruit of 
 ate aptness and of a sound experience — the dash which achieves 
 drives home a success, you are a remarkably well-equiped 
 cer for advance-guard duty. 
 
 ). What is the first requisite for a good bivouac for the 
 ance guard? 
 
 Its military position; its difficulty of access for the enemy; 
 facility for our exit from it. 
 
 3. What is the second? 
 
 \. The convenience of its location, and an abundance of 
 'plies. .. . .... 
 
 In war do you always find these two essential conditions 
 *ibined, and if not, do you delay locating your bivouac until you 
 e found them? 
 
 The exigencies of the advanced-guard duty are always 
 ssing: I calculate them cooly, and though not perhaps com- 
 tely satisfied, make my choice. If it is more necessary to post 
 'self than to rest, then I post myself. If, on the contrary, 
 ' a re urgent to rest than to post myself, I rest. But in the 
 :er case I endeavor to conceal my bivouac, and remedy as 
 as possible the insufficient defence by scouting farther to the 
 nt. 
 
 J. How would you hastily choose a bivouac? 
 
 <t. If I should discover a village, I should establish myself 
 r by it, because I should feel sure of finding in it provisions 
 forage; there would be a supply of water for my horses, and 
 case of bad weather, I should expect to obtain some shelter. 
 But if there Is no village? 
 
 v. After having, as in tfe previous case, subordinated my 
 iallation to the exigencies of the service, I should endeavor 
 get near a small stream where I should find all the water 
 
 fed; near a meadow, oat or barley-field which would furnish 
 |jj|ige for my horses; close to an enclosure where they could be 
 rei ijlarly and securely fastened; near a potato-field which would 
 ply food for my men; and within easy reach of a wood which 
 
 Id furnish pickets, shade, and branches and leaves with 
 
 ch to construct and cover our shelters and supply the 
 
 ■uac fires. 
 
 1. What other essential condition should be complied with? 
 . That the ground be firm and consequently healthy. That 
 t«oj borders of the stream should not be miry, in order to avoid 
 ijh ! risk of losing horses in leading them to water. 
 
 After having chosen your ground what do you do? 
 
 I form the squadrons in line, facing the enemy, and in 
 
 37 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Ei 
 
 order in which 1 wish them to be placed; then, setting out rr 
 self mounted, to reconnoitre the position, I leave orders wi 
 the officer who replaces me in command of the regiment or r 
 tachment, to dismount the command and send out foraging parti 
 as soon as he perceives that the grand guard has halted upon t 
 ground which it is to occupy. This signal having been givs 
 
 the troops dismount, unbridle, and fasten their horses — witho 
 mixing them up — by squadron, platoon, or squad. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because in war concentration produces order, and ord 
 gives strength. 
 
 Q. Having fastened the horses with their ropes, what is to 
 done next? 
 
 A. The bridles are placed behind them, tied up in s 
 a manner that they may be easily undone and placed on t 
 horses' heads quickly, and suspended as far as possible, from tre 
 limbs or pickets, so as to prevent their being trampled und 
 foot, lost under the forage soon to be brought in, or requiri 
 a long search if needed in a hurry. This having been done, 01 
 half of the troopers, after having suspended their belts from tl 
 tree-limbs or pickets, take their scythes and hatchets and 
 foraging, if the inhabitants have not filled the requisitions mai 
 upon them. (See Provisions and Forage) 
 
 The other half remove their arms, hang up their belts, ar 
 complete the installation. They take the fire-arms off the hors 
 and place them near their bridles and belts and under shelter 
 it is raining. 
 
 Q. Why remove the arms from the horses? 
 
 A. Because if the horses should roll, they would break ar : 
 destroy them. That done, a man remains behind the horses 
 prevent their fighting, which would result in some of them beir ; 
 wounded; to prevent their rolling, which would break the saddle 
 the others construct shelters, and if there is wood, light fin 
 in front of them. 
 
 Q. What is the first thing to be observed in constructing 
 shelter? 
 
 A. That its opening is towards the horses, so that the me 
 may always keep them in view. 
 
 Q. And the second? 
 
 A. That the closed side is towards the wind. 
 
 Q. And the third? 
 
 A. That the shelter shall be to the windward of the fi 
 and not to the leerward, that it may run no risk of being burnec : 
 
 Q. The shelter once erected, what is to be done then? 
 
 A. I lay a board or piece of wood on the ground, at 
 
 front opening of the shelter; and fasten it with pegs to reta 
 the straw upon which the men sleep, so that it may not come 
 contact with the fire, and thus set fire to the shelter. 
 
 Q. What next? 
 
 A. I place in the shelter, hanging at the head of each mar r 
 his belts, arms, bridle and haversack. 
 
 Q. Why do you put all these things there? 
 
 A. So as to keep them from the rain, from accidents, an 
 
 have them within easy reach of the men. 
 
 Q. How do you light your fire? 
 
 A. The wood being prepared. I strike my hint, light tn 
 
 tinder, place it in a piece of paper loosely rolled and twisted up i 
 a wisp of straw, and by a to-and-fro motion, like that employe 
 in stirring a salad, produce a flame which ignites the paper an 
 
 0. The fire being lighted, what then? 
 
 A. Bring water in the pails, and put the kettles on the fire 
 
 tf 
 
 38 
 
BIVOUACS 
 
 the kettles are made of tin, they must be entirely filled, other- 
 se the solder will be melted. 
 
 Q. What is done upon the return of the foragers? 
 
 A. The forage and provisions are usually placed beside the 
 is, the different articles in separate piles. The forage is fed 
 the horses a small quantity at a time, so that it may not be 
 isted; the meat is put into the kettles, and duties are assigned 
 the different members of the squad. Some watch the horses, 
 ne feed them, some rub them down with wisps of straw, some 
 ^spare the soup, some clean the vegetables, some guard against 
 nger from the fires of the neighboring shelters; others go for 
 iish supplies of wood, others for forage; others make necessary 
 >airs to the saddlery, arms and clothing, and clean soiled arms; 
 
 keep on the alert for the sound of the trumpet, 
 irhe camp duties regulated, supplies provided, the soup on the 
 i, the horses dried, the order is given to lead to water, suc- 
 jisively, by platoon or squadron. On returning from watering, 
 girths are unfastened, and the saddles enclosed shifted on 
 horses backs. That done, only the men necessary to watch the 
 ' ses feed them and look after the soup-kettles, are kept awake. 
 * others wrap themselves in their cloaks, lie down and go to 
 5 sp. When the soup is ready, the squad is awakened to eat 
 1(1 is well as their meat; what remains of the meat must bs 
 
 efully stowed aiway in the haversack. 
 
 *lf, at daybreak, “to horse” is not sounded, the horses are led 
 le water, the saddlery inspected, and that which is injured, re- 
 red; the horses are groomed without unsaddling, the saddles 
 ng merely readjusted. The supply of provisions and forage is 
 lenished, the soup kettles are refilled and placed on the fire, 
 ” I all go to sleep, if possible. In a campaign one should sleep 
 } eat whenever practicable to do so. 
 i"J. But if one is not sleepy? 
 
 a A. No matter; he must try to sleep just the same. 
 rl ?. If you have no bread to put into your soup? 
 
 If you have flour, make dough or cakes of it; if not, take 
 grain you have, grind it between two stones, and make dough 
 the meal. 
 
 If you have no kettle in which to make soup? 
 
 \. Cut up your meat, and toast it on the end of a stick. 
 
 J. Of what should the bivouac guard be composed? 
 l. Of a greater or less number of men, according to the 
 ngth of the command in bivouac; it should never have less 
 in h one non-commissioned officer, one trumpeter, and four privates, 
 ml. Where is it placed? 
 
 t. At the center of the bivouac, near the hut of the colonel, 
 Mother commanding officer, 
 ai |i. What are its duties? 
 
 ill. To furnish a sentinel for the entrance of the bivouao, on 
 side toward the grand guard. When the regiment is united, 
 guard is composed of ten men and commanded by a non- 
 111 ^missioned officer, and furnishes a sentinel for the entrance of 
 bivouac, and one other who is posted over the arms, and 
 hut of the colonel. A captain commands the police guard 
 > r l;he bivouac. 
 
 I). What are the duties of the police-guard? 
 
 To take charge of men undergoing punishment, to exe- 
 Is orders of the commander in regard to the police-guard, to 
 11 >n the alert durng the night, reporting any suspicious noises 
 I* -d, especially those coming from the side of the enemy, and 
 al mmediately call the colonel if necessary. The orders to the 
 imand are given through the trumpeter of the guard. 
 
 , i. Where are the horses of the dismounted members of the 
 -d kept? 
 
 39 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Q. 
 
 A. 
 
 0 . 
 
 A. 
 
 A. They remain with their platoons, where they are tat 
 care of. 
 
 Q. What rules are to be observed in feeding the horses? 
 
 A. The chapter on Forage and Provisions will give them. 
 
 Q. How many men may be conveniently accommodated for 
 one fire or shelter? 
 
 A. From eight to ten, because one kettle will suffice for th 
 cooking, and there will be men enough to perform every kind 
 duty necessary for their comfort. Let the men remember that 
 bivouac a mutuality of duty, an equality of fatigue duty, shot 
 be strictly provided for, and enforced: and no soldier should 
 pect from another any service greater than that which he is will 
 to render in return. 
 
 Q. How do the officers live in bivouac? 
 
 A. By themselves, according to squadrons, if serving 
 gether; if separated, they may mess with their men; but in t 
 case they must not only put all their own provisions, but sor 
 thing in addition, into the kettle whose contents they share. 
 Who constructs the shelters of the officers? 
 
 Themselves, assisted by the men who share them with the 
 Who repairs their things? 
 
 Themselves, or their servants. An officer's servant 
 obliged only to feed and groom the officer’s horse; if he dc r 
 more, it is of his own free !wi‘ 
 
 Q. What are the duties of an officer or non-commissior 
 
 officer in bivouac? 
 
 A. If not ordered on some special service, separating him fr 
 his platoon or squadron he must sleep less than his subordinat . 
 see that the horses feed, drink, are well secured, and are i 
 allowed to fight ore another; that the supply of forage is sufficii 
 for the night; that damaged saddlery is repaired: that the sadd 
 are replaced on the horses' backs; that the packing is re; ; 
 
 justed if badly placed; that the arms are sheltered; that I 
 men do not leave the bivouac except for good reasons; that nc • 
 of them becomes drunk; that they do not abuse their horses: tif 
 their things are so placed that they can mount promptly at 
 first note of the trumpet; that the old soldiers do not worry I » 
 
 young ones; that there is no quarreling; that the orders of I < 
 
 commander are quickly and exactly executed: that the forag 
 bring into the bivouac nothing but what is useful and indispensa - 
 for establishing the bivouac and for supplying the needs of 
 men and horses. 
 
 When “to horre" sounds, the officers and non-commission 
 officers should be the first ones upon the assembly ground of 
 squadron, which will be where they dismounted. Then the 
 will be called, and they will note if the men, whose names 
 answered, are actually present. Then they will take a rapid ti i 
 through the vacated bivouac to see if anything has been left 
 hind; if anything b* found, it will be picked up, and sent to t 
 man who has forgotten it. Sometimes troops on leaving 
 bivouac, set fire to it: this is wrong, because the abandoned bivoi r 
 may be of use to other troops; because the fire communicating w 
 the surrounding country may cause serious and destructive lossi ■ 
 and because the remains of the bivouac may in many cases 
 useful to the poor peasants already ruined by the war. It rr 
 happen that a bivouac will have to be burned for military reaso [ 
 but even then it should be done only bv order of the command 
 If the bivouac is abandoned before the soup is ready to 
 eaten, empty the kettles, but never neglect to take them i 
 the meat they contain, with you. When several detachments 
 different regiments bivouac together, each should have added 
 the regular trumpet calls a distinguishing note of its own; 
 
 this precaution be not taken, the individual movement of ea 
 
 40 
 
FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 itachment should be ordeied verbally, and not by trumpet signals. 
 Q. It sometimes happens, then, that commands are given 
 ithout using the trumpet? 
 
 A. Yes; especially whenever one wishes to conceal the move- 
 ents he is executing, or intends to execute; in this case the 
 ( ders of the colonel are delivered by the adjutant to the superior 
 licers, who, in their turn, transmit them to the captains and 
 on. 
 
 FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 In war it is necessary, above all things, that the few hours 
 llowed the trooper for feeding his horse should be employed 
 iilely for that purpose; for the strength of the horse depends 
 mon his proper nourishment, and upon that strength depends 
 e proper performance of our duties and all our hopes of 
 taining distinction, 
 
 a In war one cannot always choose the forage for his horse; 
 t nevertheless there are certain precautions which may always 
 taken to guide in the selection or improve the quality of it. 
 loir instance, it is better to feed green grass than new hay. 
 
 I ie well-grown grass from a meadow is the best, and rye 
 ss is the next in order, as regards ease of digestion, but 
 contains less nutriment than alfalfa or clover, 
 f you can obtain nothing but clover, be careful in its use. 
 r cavalry, which arrived In perfect condition on the banks 
 the Niemen, to open the Russian campaign, lost more than 
 thousand horses in a single night from eating clover. As 
 own horses were among those which succumbed, I have 
 d for the privelege of speaking with authority on the subject. 
 If there be time to permit the clover to wilt before it is 
 to the horses, a great source of danger will be removed. Clover 
 t the night before it is to be used rarely does harm. If 
 grass can be obtained, the leaves of certain trees may take 
 i place of it; those of the elm are best. 
 
 When possible to procure grass that has not been wet, take 
 in preference to that on which the rain has fallen. Should 
 rain upon the bivouac, pile the cut grass in heaps, and 
 en the rain has ceased, use first that which has been kept 
 r. 
 
 If nothing but new hay can be obtained, choose that which 
 t s been most thoroughly aired, and is consequently the driest; feed 
 inly a little of it at a time, and after having moistened it 
 lightly with salted water, — if possible — which will prevent 
 toe generation of gas in the horse's stomach. The hay usually 
 Ikiund in barns is new, feed it only in small quantities, 
 i If you have other grain than oats, soak it for four or five 
 ig urs in water, until it swells, before feeding it; if that can- 
 1011 jt be done, feed it in small quantities only, and allow the 
 »i rse to drink no water until after the grain has been digested. 
 ,ini Horses suffering from fatigue seldom have good appetites; 
 is too much forage be placed before them at one time they 
 ' 1 1 become disgusted and refuse to eat; be careful, then, 
 sol give them their forage in small portions only. This precaution 
 nil, equally important in the contrary case of gross feeders; if 
 D eir forage be given them in large portions, they will be 
 mely to suffer from indigestion, and even founder. 
 
 Is Should you find a field of growing oats, reap them, and 
 ■I rash them upon a piece of smooth ground or upon a cloak, 
 en collect the grain and winnow it by shaking and tossing 
 u up in a current of air. This operation, repeated several 
 
 41 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 times, will cleanse it thoroughly, and enable you to feed i 
 
 without fear of the rough and pointed husks sticking to the horse' 
 throat to make him cough and otherwise distress him. To preven 
 your horse losing his grain, put it into a nose bag and let him ea 
 out of that. 
 
 As a rule, horses should not be allowed to drink while warm 
 nevertheless, if on the march, and they should become thirsty .. 
 
 when a stream is reached the commander of the detachment shouli ' 
 order them to be watered, but without the troopers dismountini y 
 or unbridling, the time lost thus may be regained by increasini „ 
 the gait. 
 
 If you have flour, try to make bread of it; but if you canno ; 
 do that, make cakes of dough with the help of a little sal 
 and water and bake them on the live coals; or else make ball! T 
 of dough and cook them in boiling water. 
 
 A trooper who knows his business always carries in his walle 
 
 salt, pepper, and an onion or a clove or garlic; with these mean \ 
 
 of seasoning his food anything can be made palatable. 
 
 Never throw away what is left after you have eaten; wh< 
 can say that tomorrow you may not die of hunger? 
 
 In war a little tin kettle Is a fortune in itself. I have knowr 
 troopers who never wanted for anything, yet carried with then- 1 
 
 nothing but their little kettle; by lending that they wer< 
 
 certain of a portion of whatever was cooked in it. 
 
 A knife is an indespensable article in bivouac. 
 
 Some troopers, under the pretext of foraging, take everything 
 they can lay hands on. Such an offence should be so severely pun- “ 
 ished that the mere recollecton of the example made would prevent 
 any repetition of the dishonesty. No mercy should be shown s 
 thief. 
 
 Q. What distinction is to be made between “going foraging' ; 
 and going on a "foraging expedition”? 
 
 A. “Going foraging” is simply to seek for forage and sub- ; 
 
 slstenoe In the vicinity of the bivouac, or close to the column ‘ 
 
 halted by tne commander for that purpose. "Going 1 , on a 
 foraging expedition” expresses quite a different thing. A body 
 of troops having exhausted the resources of their bivouac or 
 cantonments, they are obliged to seek, at a distance, that which 
 is no longer near by, and a foraging expedition is ordered. 
 Numerous detachments of all arms are assembled and started ' 
 out. On arriving at the designated place the cavalry is charged \ 
 with performing the outpost duty. It posts vedettes and grand 
 guards; it even drives back the enemy, if necessary, while the 
 remainder of the troops seize the supplies contained in the village, 1 
 load them upon wagons, and take them into the camp, where * 
 a regular distribution is made. The best method of foraging 
 in a village is to assemble the authorities of the place at 
 once, and make a requisition upon them; if the peasants fill 
 the requisitions promptly everything is done regularly, nothing 
 is wasted, and you have, in addition, your men all together and 
 in condition to meet an attack. 
 
 If there be no village, and the object of the expedition is 
 merely to bring in a supply of grass for the horses, the mowers, 
 protected by our chain of vedettes, make the grass up into trusses, 
 tied securely with forage cords, fasten them upon their horses, 
 and return to camp in an orderly manner. The supporting 
 troops then perform the duties prescribed for the escorts ot 
 convoys. 
 
 Q. What is a truss? 
 
 A. Two large bundles of long forage, of equal weight held 
 together by a cord passing over the back of the horse, so that 
 one hanging on each side of him they will balance the other. On 
 arriving at the bivouac, the forage is all delivered at some one 
 place and thence distributed. 
 
 42 
 
FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 
 Q. If the enemy should attack the foraging party? 
 
 A. It must be vigorously defended. 
 
 Q. If the enemy should outnumber the supporting troops? 
 A. The mowers adandon their work, mount their horses 
 go to the assistance of their comrades. 
 
 Q. Suppose the trusses are already loaded upon the horses? 
 
 A. All, or a part, of the troopers engaged in mowing, 
 irow down their trusses and join the supporting troops. If 
 le enemy be repulsed, the trusses are picked up again; but 
 lould we be outnumbered, although the trusses may be lost, 
 e men will be saved. 
 
 Q. Are the troopers detailed to do the mowing armed? 
 
 A. Certainly. As a general rule, there is no duty to be 
 
 Jrfomed In war which will permit the wearing of arms to be 
 spensed with. Whenever a trooper is mounted he should 
 ,|J fully armed, and leave nothing behind him which he may 
 ijive to return for. 
 
 Q. Is it possible to calculate simply by inspection the number 
 rations of grain or long forage, dry or green, contained in a pile 
 grain, a stack of hay or straw, or in a meadow? 
 
 A. This question may be answered by giving the calculations 
 ade by Captain Jacquinot de Presles, in his excellent work 
 titled “Course of Military Art and History.” A cubic metre 
 hay, well packed, weighs about 130 kilogrammes; a cubic 
 etre of straw, about 85 kilogrammes. It is very easy, by 
 ultiplying together the length, breadth, and the height of the 
 >ace filled by the stores, to find the number of cubic metres 
 ley contain; but should the heaps or stacks be cylindrical, 
 e contents may be arrived at by multiplying the radius of 
 e circle forming the base by the circumference, and taking one 
 ilf of that product and multiplying it by the height of the 
 ack. A cubic metre of grain contains 10 hectolitres, and one 
 ctolitre contains about 12 average rations, giving about 
 JO rations to the cubic metre. 
 
 A hectolitre of wheat weighs about 75 kilos. 
 
 A hectolitre of rye weighs about 70> kilos. 
 
 A hectolitre of barley weighs about 65 kilos. 
 
 A hectolitre of otats weighs aboht 40 kilos. 
 
 A hectolitre of Indian corn weighs about 80 kilos. 
 
 Good land produces per hectare, a square of 100 metres, 
 iout 3000 kilos, of green forage; bad land, about 1500 or 2000. 
 Q. What is a grand guard? 
 
 A. An advance-guard placed between the main body and 
 e of its detachments, to relieve or support the vedettes in 
 se of an attack by the enemy, in order to give the necessary 
 ■ne to the detachment or cantonment which it covers, to prepare 
 r defense or retreat. (L.R.A.) 
 
 Q. Where is the grand guard posted? 
 
 A. Upon the route by which it is presumed the enemy will 
 vance to attack the bivouac. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. To delay the attack and give the bivouac time to prepare 
 meet it in good shape. As nearly as possible at the centre of 
 e line of vedettes. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. So that the vedettes attacked will, in retreating upon it, 
 i at the same time approaching their supports. Therefore the 
 notion of several roads or paths is a favorable place for 
 sting a grand guard. The latter should bear to the vedettes 
 e same relation that the hinged end of a fan does to the 
 per ends of its outspread sticks. 
 
 Q. Who posts the grand guard? 
 
 A. The commanding officer himself, unless he has with him 
 
 43 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 an experienced officer worthy of his entire confidence. 
 
 Q. When does he post it? 
 
 A. After having reconnoitred the ground thoroughly, and ob ! 
 tained the best possible information concerning it. 
 
 Q. How is the strengtn of the grand guard determined? 
 
 A. By the number of vedettes required, allowing four mer: 
 for each vedette posted. (L. R. A.) 
 
 Q. How is a grand guard formed? 
 
 A. Upon reaching the ground where it is to be posted, thi ; 
 advance guard being mounted, the men detailed for the granc ' 
 guard move out of ranks, and place themselves in front of the 
 line, facing the enemy. The officers designated to command them 
 cause them to break into column and march under the direction o 
 the commander of the advance-guard, who has already reconnoitrec 
 the ground. On arriving at the place where the grand guard is 
 to take post, they form line and halt. Then the men who are 
 to form the small posts are designated, and they move out of ranks: 
 to the front and face toward the enemy. The corporals, or ole 
 soldiers, who are to command the small posts of four men each 
 move out of ranks and recognize the men who are to be placec 
 under their command. This preparatory work having been com- 
 pleted, fhe small post detachments are reunited and marched ofl 
 under the orders of the commander of the grand guard, and undei " 
 the direction of the commander of the advance-guard, or the offices 
 detailed to perform his duty; this officer moves towards the 
 centre of the line of small posts about to be established, and 
 halts. The central post is first placed as well as the vedette 
 which it is to furnish; then the posts iwhioh are to occupy the 
 line upon one of the flanks move out together, and are posted suc- 
 cessively, as well as their vedettes. This duty performed, the 
 commander of the advance guard returns to the central point, 
 inspecting on his way the line of vedettes he has just traced, 
 and rectifying it if necessary; then he completes the lire by 
 doing for the second part of his small post detachments what : 
 he did for the first. 
 
 Q. Has he no duty to perform in regard to the posting of the 
 vedettes? 
 
 A. Yes; to give to the commander of the grand guard all the 
 topographical information he possesses in regard to the ground, and . 
 to communicate to him his ideas as to the probable operations of - 
 the enemy, so that he may be fully advised as to the point he 
 must specially watch. To these details he adds such orders as 
 he thinks should be executed under such or such circumstances. 
 
 0- What dees the commander of the grand guard do upon re- 
 turning to his post? 
 
 A. He dismounts his command and prescribes the duties of ; 
 the rounds. He orders the officers and non-commissioned officers 
 who will have command of them to reconnoitre the line of small 
 posts and vedettes. Next he accompanies the commander of the 
 advance-guard, who indicates to him the lire to be occupied by 
 the grand guard at night, and gives him directions as to his 
 line of retreat in certain cases. He accompanies this officer 
 as far as the picket and informs himself in regard to its position. 
 On returning to the guard he thoroughly re-examines the ground 
 passed over, so that if the grand guard should be attacked at 
 night, no matter from what side, he could withdraw as well as 
 by day, by taking advantage of his knowledge of the ground to 
 avoid the obstacles which might obstruct the retreat of one un- 
 informed in regard to them. 
 
 Q. What dees the commander of the grand guard do on reach- 
 ing his post again? 
 
 A. He gives out the countersign, which is communicated to 
 the small posts, inspects the arms; receives the forage sent to him 
 
 44 
 
FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 from the picket or the regiment; directs one half of his horses 
 to be unbridled and fed, but not unpacked, while the men remain 
 near them. He visits his small posts and vedettes frequently, 
 and often he even goes outside of his line so as to judge better 
 of the opportunity offered to the enemy to make an unexpected 
 attack. He requires his vedettes to recognize him whenever he 
 comes in view, then he questions them to assure himself that they 
 understand their orders, and inspects their arms to make cer- 
 tain that they will not miss fire. He makes his tours with 
 greater frequency if the enemy is near, if his men are not well 
 trained, are much fatigued, or if the weather is very bad. He 
 allows the grand guard and vedettes to put on their cloaks, but 
 not to turn up their collars, as that would prevent their hearing 
 distinctly. In very bad weather he reduces the number of hours 
 which a vedette has to remain on post. 
 
 If the enemy is seen to execute any movements, he warns his 
 icommander; if the movement is an important one, he sends an 
 officer or intelligent non-commissioned officer to explain it clearly. 
 If the vedettes discharge their pieces, he causes his oommand to 
 bridle and mount, and goes in person to the point whence the 
 sound of firing seems to come. If attacked, he will withdraw 
 
 in good order, skirmishing, and execute what is prescribed for 
 rear guards. If rounds visit him he will receive them himself. He 
 sends out patrols which keep up constant communication between 
 the small posts. These patrols, taken from the half of the com- 
 mand whose horses are kept bridled, are sent out more frequently 
 when the small posts and vedettes are unusually distant. When- 
 ever he leaves the grand guard he temporarily transfers the com- 
 mand to the senior officer present, to whom he gives detailed in- 
 structions as to his duties. 
 
 Q. Should a grand guard be allowed to have a fire? 
 
 A. Sometimes; but it must not light up very much spaoe, 
 and the place for it must be chosen so that the enemy can see 
 as little of it as possible. 
 
 Q. What is a small post? 
 
 A. A grand guard of the grand guard. 
 
 Q. What are the duties of a commander of a small post? 
 
 A. He posts a vedette, gives him the countersign and his 
 Instructions, and makes known to him certain signals to be used. 
 Then he thoroughly reconnoitres the surrounding ground with a 
 view to discovering what advantages or obstacles it would present 
 
 1! in case of an attack upon the line compelling a retreat of the 
 :!l whole upon the advanced guard. He must keep his vedettes con- 
 itantly in sight as well as those on each side of him, and closely 
 rbserve the country in advance of the line he is charged with 
 juarding. Whenever his vedette makes a signal which he does 
 not understand clearly he mounts his horse and goes to discover 
 the meaning of it. If it proves to be serious, he mounts the men 
 nf the small post and sends to warn the grand guard. Should it 
 move to be of no importance, he reassures and reprimands the 
 edette, and signals to the small post to dismount, in order that 
 his movement, indicating no cause for alarm, may reassure the 
 irand guard. 
 
 If the vedette discharges his piece, the small post mounts in- 
 tantly. Whenever the commander of a small post leaves it, he 
 must keep within view of his men, and mount or dismount them 
 jy means of signals agreed upon beforehand. 
 
 If, in looking over the ground in front of his vedettes, he 
 fiscovers any movements which have escaped the notice of the 
 redette, he must call his attention to them either by signals or 
 >y going to him and telling him of them, and reprimand him 
 harply for his inattention. He must frequently inspect the arms 
 
 45 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 in the hands of his men, and especially those of the men posted 
 vedettes. 
 
 Sleep and rest are both forbidden to the commander of 
 grand guard or a small post. 
 
 At daybreak and at nightfall their vigilance must be redouble 
 for these are usually the hours chosen for making attacks. Th 
 must see everything with their own eyes, and prevent their mi 
 being seized by panics, which spread easily, call a whole army 
 arms and bring discredit upon the officer rommanding the po 
 where they originate. 
 
 During the whole time that reconnaissances are out the hors 
 of the large posts are kept bridled. 
 
 Q. May a small post have a fire? 
 
 A. Not without special permission. 
 
 Q. May the horses be unbridled? 
 
 A. Never. 
 
 Q. What is a vedette? 
 
 A. A mounted sentinel posted in the vicinity of the enem s 
 
 Q. What are his duties? 
 
 A. To watch with the greatest attention the movements 
 
 the enemy, if he is within sight; to let no noise escape his notiC' 
 to watch carefully everything which may be of interest to tf e 
 
 guard of the detachment to which he belongs; to signal to h 
 small post notice of everything which may appear threatenin' 
 and to give warning of an attack by discharging his piece. 
 
 Q. Which is the best place to choose for placing a vedette ■ 
 
 A. One from which he can see everything without being seer r 
 
 thus a long piece of wall, a clump of trees, a hedge, a shallo : 
 ditch, are all favorable for masking a vedette; he should nevi t 
 fail to employ them for concealing his presence. 
 
 Q. If the point from which a vedette can get the best vie r 
 should be a bare hill, what should he do? 
 
 A. Place himself a little in rear of the crest so that the line < 
 
 the crest will cover him as much as possible, without preventir i 
 
 his seeing beyond it. 
 
 0- If a lancer is posted as a vedette and can, with a litti ■ 
 care, conceal himself, what should he do? 
 
 A. Lower his lance, or remove his pennon, so that it may nc r 
 betray his position. 
 
 Q. If the ground upon which the chain of vedettes is place 
 is undulating, should vedettes also be placed in the depressions ■ 
 
 A. Vedettes must be posted wherever the approach of th 
 enemy is to be feared; thus, one vedette is placed upon a heigh 
 to observe a plain, another at the foot of a mountain to observ 
 a gorge, a wood, or a sunken road, and to protect the vedette wh( 
 on the hill-tops might, if not warned, be surrounded before the c 
 knew it. 
 
 Q. What further precautions are to be observed in choosin . 
 posts for vedette? 
 
 A. To take care that the vedette placed in a depression i ■ 
 able to see, as well as possible, one or two of those on the sam 
 line with him, in order that he may be warned by them of an 
 danger threatening him, in oase of a movement by the enem} . 
 
 Q. What orders apply to all vedettes? 
 
 A. Never dismount unless by special permission of the corr ,, 
 mander of the grand guard, and always have the carbine o 
 pistol in readiness to fire. 
 
 Q. In posting a vedette what orders are given him? 
 
 A. First, point out to him the ground he is to observe r 
 Indicate all the points of special importance which he Is t 
 watch; direct him to look frequently toward the other vedette 
 who, with him, form the chain; next give him a signal bv whic t 
 he warns, and is warned by, the other vedettes that It I 
 
 46 
 
FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 lecessary to redouble vigilance, and be prepared for coming 
 events. Then give him another signal with which to warn the 
 iommander of his own small post who, on seeing it, immediately 
 omes out to reconnoitre. 
 
 Q. Can the distance at which the enemy is seen be estimated? 
 a A. At two thousand metres, men and horses are seen as mere 
 Siioints; at twelve hundred, infantry can be distinguished from 
 navalry; at eight hundred, individual movements may be distin- 
 tuished; at seven hundred, the heads of the men may be dis- 
 tinguished from their bodies; at four hundred, the head of a 
 lan can be clearly seen. (Jacquinot de Presles) 
 mi Q. Is a vedette permitted to leave or change his post? 
 
 A. Never, under any pretext, without special permission, given 
 1 advance. 
 
 Q. Is he required to observe anything besides the enemy? 
 A. It is his duty to see everything that takes place; for instance, 
 F he should see a peasant come out of the wood, enter it again, 
 10 out of it and approach the chain of vedettes, it is probable 
 ny hat he is a spy, and the small post should be signaled. If a 
 ust is seen to rise regularly along the horizon, it is probably 
 tnade by a marching column, and warning should be given; if 
 is signal is made by another vedette, it must be repeated as a 
 learning to his own small post. 
 
 til Q. When danger threatens, what should be done? 
 
 OS! A. The vedettes are doubled. In this case one of them may 
 e sent back to warn the small post, if necessary, while the other 
 lijmains in observation of the enemy; if the vedettes have special 
 si rders to leave their posts to reconnoitre in front of their line. 
 Mi arrest suspicious characters found prowling about, etc., one 
 (if them will perform that duty while the other remains on post. 
 
 n the case of double vedettes, if the enemy advances, the vedettes 
 tire numerous enough to form a strong line of resistance, and 
 kirmish, while retreating, if not pushed back too briskly. 
 
 < Q. What should a vedette do when he sees himself about to 
 it 3 attacked? 
 
 A. Turn his horse to the left, bringing his right flank toward 
 t! le enemy, so that he can more quickly complete his left about, 
 id when the movement of the enemy is decided, discharge his 
 itirb ine. 
 
 Q. How often are the vedettes relieved? 
 
 A. Ordinarily, each one will be relieved after one hour’s duty, 
 
 15 ) that the whole post will be relieved every four hours. 
 
 Q. Are the vedettes posted at night in the places occupied 
 lairing the day? 
 
 r ' 1 A. At night the vedettes are brought nearer to the small 
 to !>sts, hese nearer to the grand guards, and these nearer to the 
 11 tatachment. In daytime the horizon of a vedette cannot be too 
 
 tended; but at night it is quite different, and, in order that the 
 
 « bdette may be able to see, especially when the night is dark, 
 e line of the horizon must be brought closer to him. For 
 
 at reason the vedette who, in the daytime, was placed upon 
 ''height, must be posted in a hollow at night, and his eyes 
 5 ust be fixed attentively and at a suitable distance, upon the 
 ■I ine of the neighboring ground which cuts the line of the sky. 
 lould the enemy present himself, no matter how dark the night 
 ay be, the vedette will be able to see him outlined against the 
 ■ rizon, and, if on challenging him no answer is made, the 
 
 Idette will fire. A position for the night should be taken only 
 
 ter it has become too dark for the enemy to perceive the 
 trograde movement. The positions for the day should be taken 
 by the vedettes just at dawn, so as to prevent the enemy’s 
 essing at the positions occupied at night, and from which the 
 dettes are moved forward. In making this forward movement 
 
 47 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. 
 
 A. 
 
 “to at°bt d oa b d e es! aken t0 SC0U ‘ Wel ' ‘° the f '°" 1 to a ^id fall!, 
 
 0. What is a picket? 
 
 Suard. Tr °° PS P ' aCed between the detachments and the grai 
 
 Q. Where is it posted? 
 
 A. Should troops be bivouacked in rear of a villaae t 
 Picket would be posted at the opposite side, towards the enem 
 and a few hundred yards in rear of the grand guard. 
 
 Q. Will the men be permitted to occupy houses’ 
 
 A. The horses may be assembled and placed in open barn 
 the men will bivouac. 
 
 Q. Are the horses kept bridled? 
 
 Only half of them. 
 
 What is generally the numerical force of the picket’ 
 
 It should equal that of the grand guard. 
 
 What is its duty? 
 
 It posts one sentinel twenty-five paces in its front, wi 
 orders to listen for any suspicious noises coming from the dire 
 tion of the grand guard, and to prevent men passing witho 
 permission, from the bivouac to the outposts. 
 
 Q. Does it not also keep a sentinel over the arms of t 
 command ? 
 
 A. No; for the arms remain upon the horses, and the sentim r 
 spoken of above, is not far away. The picket assures the safe 
 of the rear of the grand guard, and furnishes patrols which sco 
 in front and on the flanks. If the grand guard is attacked, t 
 picket warns the main body, supports the outposts, and retir 
 only when they do so. The officers of the picket are permiti 
 to take turns in sleeping. 
 
 Q. Is it always necessary to have a picket in rear of t 
 grand guard? 
 
 A. No; a grand guard needs the support of a picket on 
 when very near the enemy, or when the latter is likely to ma 
 an attack. When these conditions do not exist, it is useless 
 double the duty; but in such a case the main body in bivou 
 will have to exercise increased vigilance. 
 
 Q. What is a patrol? 
 
 A. A detachment of flying vedettes. 
 
 Q. Of what are patrols usually composed? 
 
 A. Ordinarily of two troopers commanded by a corpori 
 or an old soldier. They are much more useful than vedettes, a 
 may sometimes entirely replace them. In that case their duty 
 continuous, and their observation constant. 
 
 Q. Under what circumstances would that be the case? 
 
 A. If infantry and cavalry bivouac together, the former wou . 
 furnish the sentinels, the latter the patrols. 
 
 If a partisan, harassed and in danger, has retreated, 
 barricaded himself at a farm, from the tops of whose bui Id in : 
 he can see to a great distance, he posts no vedettes, but patrc 
 the surrounding country. Good patrols, conducted intelligent 
 are generally much more efficient than vedettes. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because the nature of the duty admits of no sleepin 
 it compels men to display all their resources of intelligence a 
 courage; and the exploration of the country is made more th< 
 oughly and to a greater distance. 
 
 Q. How should men conduct themselves when on patrol? 
 
 A. March without noise of any kind, carry on no conversatic 
 fasten the sabre so that the scabbard will strike against neith 
 the spur nor stirrup: carry the carbine In one hand, so that 
 will make no noise by striking against the swivel, or fastenin 
 
 48 
 
FORAGE AND SUBSISTENCE 
 
 the slingbelt. Keep the horses on dirt roads, so that no 
 ise will be made by their shoes striking the stones of paved 
 ids. In daytime the men must move along under cover of 
 Iges, walls, sunken roads, and ravines; they must lower their 
 ices, so that their pennons will not betray them; they must 
 iceal themselves in woods, and make their observations 
 ough the openings. 
 
 <V.t night they must endeavor to see even in the darkness; 
 t frequently, follow sunken roads, and refrain from smoking, 
 as not to light up their faces. If the enemy is encountered 
 y must not fire, but conceal themselves, and one of tha 
 
 trol must be sent, if possible without risk of discovery, to 
 
 rn the grand guard. The men of a cavalry patrol must not 
 
 rch side by side, but one behind the other, and far enough 
 irt to enable them to see well, to afford protection to one 
 
 ither, and, in case of falling into an ambuscade, to prevent 
 whole patrol being cut off and captured at once. 
 
 The routes which patrols travel may be, relatively to our 
 
 in of vedettes, either interior or exterior; in the latter case 
 ater vigilance must be exercised, because the danger is 
 ater. The exterior patrols should consider themselves flying 
 a ettes who have the advantage over the fixed ones of being 
 ij to reconnoitre everything which arouses their suspicions; 
 
 I marching, halting and concealing themselves as long as they 
 ' t think necessary. It is often useful to send patrols of 
 ] or two men to distant points, where they may remain in 
 
 ervation for several hours at a time. 
 
 i patrol which has ventured too far, and which a hostile 
 t challenges, must be careful not to reply, if they do not 
 
 ik the enemy’s language, or if, before going out, they have not 
 
 II ned a few words of the language which, spoken in answer 
 
 * the challenge, may suspend the examination, and give them 
 
 I 3 to turn about without danger, and gain some ground 
 
 " [he rear. 
 
 f the enemy is advancing upon our posts and is likely to 
 ve there before they are warned of his coming, the patrol 
 jid discharge their carbines and return, skirmishing, by 
 road on which they went out. 
 
 II ' have been told that in the campaign of Portugal our cavalry, 
 ‘ g obliged to march over rocky and sonorous ground, put 
 lies of sheepskin on their horses’ feet (the wool inside), and 
 
 them about the fetlocks, so that our patrols approached 
 close to the English vedettes without the latter hearing 
 •'(i. This would be a good thing to try again under similar 
 imstances. 
 
 1 trooper on patrol may sometimes be surprised in spite of the 
 test vigilance, especially if he has to traverse a wooded 
 "I broken country. He should halt frequently, and carefully 
 1 ;h his horse's ears. The direction in which they point 
 
 give him valuable information. It is an indication he cannot 
 , d to despise, as it is instinctive; and if the horse persists in 
 111 1 action, especially to the point of being frightened, the 
 
 * e of it should be discovered, if possible. Two patrols, 
 “ 'ling outside of the chain of outposts, should recognize each 
 
 lr, if possible, without challenging, especially if the enemy is 
 ■ rn to be in the vicinity. When patrols are sent out, the! 
 i'fjosts should be informed in regard to their numbers, uniforms, 
 
 ! I so that there may be no doubt or hesitation about admitting 
 I'Bi when they return to their own lines. 
 
 '■t Are the grand guards and pickets allowed to go out 
 
 ■ling? 
 
 49 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 A. No; if the enemy is near or a surprise is feared, 
 supplies for men and horses are sent out from the main bod 
 Q. How are the horses of a grand guard watered? 
 
 A. A small number at a time. Those already sent to w 
 must return before others are allowed to go out 
 
 DETACHMENTS 
 
 A. 
 
 Q- 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. How does cavalry march in campaign? 
 
 A. Almost always in detachments. 
 
 Q. What is a detachment? 
 
 A - E y e . y . body , of troops detached by order from the a 
 corps, division, brigade, regiment, squadron or platoon to w 
 it belongs. 
 
 Q. Are there different kinds of detachments? 
 
 Yes. 
 
 What are they? 
 
 The detachments (properly so called) are advance-gu 
 rear-guards, pickets, reconnaissances, patrols, foraging par : 
 escorts and partisans. 
 
 Q. Have these detachments a special duty? 
 
 A. Yes: of which the most active viligance is the mainspi ' 
 and the safety of the troops they protect, the object. 
 
 0- How are these war detachments detailed? 
 
 A. By taking a number of men from each squadron pr< 1 
 tionate to the numerical strength of each squadron presei 
 
 Q. Why are the detachments not composed preferably of 
 from the same squadron? 
 
 A. Because, if a misfortune were to overtake the detachn 
 the squadron would find itself deprived for a whole campaig 
 that number of officers or troopers, while the other squadror 
 the regiment would be complete. 
 
 Q. To whom is given the command of these detachments 
 
 A. To the officers and non-commissioned officers in their 
 ular turns, beginning with the seniors of each grade. 
 
 Q. Is this rule invariable? 
 
 A. No; for important duties, officers and non-commissi 
 officers who have given proof of their merit, zeal, and coi 
 are chosen; seniority must fortify its rights by the additic 
 these qualities if it does not wish to experience the sham 
 surrendering them to younger men. 
 
 Q. What is the first duty of the commander of a detachm I 
 
 A. To inspect his troops before marching; to assure hir ‘ 
 that the horses are properly saddled and girthed, well oa 
 and well shod, that the men are provided witn cartridges: tha 
 sabres are sharp and the lances pointed: that the firearm 
 in good condition and furnished with new flints. 
 
 Q. What is his second duty? 
 
 To have his detachment promptly mounted. 
 
 The third? 
 
 To bring it into action in the most advantageous ma 
 The fourth? 
 
 To see that it eats and sleeps at proper times. 
 
 Where, in any case — as for instance, a hurried depa 
 in the night, or in bad weather — a commander cannot inspec > 
 command before beginning his march, rwhat should he do? 
 
 A. When the day dawns or the rain ceases, he makes hi 
 spection without halting, by causing the command to march 
 open files — placing himself in the interval; he calls the atte 
 of his officers to any neglects discovered, and at the fi'st 
 has them corrected under the immediate suoervision of the 
 officers. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q- 
 
 50 
 
DETACHMENTS 
 
 Q. When the column is en route and at a distance from the 
 emy, what should the commander do? 
 
 A. After having formed his advance and rear guard he starts 
 e command on the road it is to follow. Then he halts to cgunt 
 5 men, and to make the inspection of which I have just spoken; 
 ures himself that the officers and non-commissioned officers are 
 their proper places and attentive to their duties; that no one 
 mains behind, that none of the horses are lame, that they are 
 t wasting their strength uselessly, that the rear-guard maintains 
 proper distance and brings up all the stragglers. After having 
 irched for sometime in rear to see for himself that everything 
 as it should be, he takes his place at the head of the de- 
 .hment. After having marched for three-quarters of an hour, or an 
 ur at most, during which the horses will have dunged, a halt is 
 3 to allow them to urinate; the command is dismounted; 
 girths are readjusted; the tails which may have become un- 
 d will be tied up again; all defects in dress, packing, and sad- 
 ry will be remedied. Then the command is remounted and the 
 irch resumed, as far as possible, with open files. If marching 
 3r an undulating country, he halts at the top of every hill and 
 ks back to judge of the regularity of the march. If the gait 
 the head of the column is too rapid, he decreases it; if too 
 ,w, increases it. It is bet'er to have it too rapid than too slow, 
 some horses have strides so short that they interrupt and break 
 gait of others, they should be put at the tail of the column, 
 commander should endeavor to keep his men in a cheerful 
 me of mind by encouraging them to sing and talk. 
 
 If the column is composed of several squadrons, he directs the 
 ferent commanders to keep their proper distances and avoid 
 t>wding upon those in front of them. From time to time the 
 j nmand is halted so that lost distances may be regained. When 
 f of the distance has been covered, no matter how short the 
 rch may be, the command is formed in column of squadrons 
 division distance, on one side of the road, dismounted and a 
 t of half an hour made, during which the men eat their lunch. 
 
 officers take advantage of this halt to rectify the position 
 the packs. This halt should always be made so that on 
 skiving at the camping place the men will have nothing to do 
 to take care of their horses. If the march is a long one, 
 esuming it the command will move out by its left; if the march 
 in Ito last for several days, each squadron takes its turn at the 
 d of the column. 
 
 in 3- What is the rate of marching for a column at a walk? 
 hli A. About four thousand metres (3.1 miles) per hour, and al- 
 pa st twice that at a trot. 
 
 a Q. Should the command come to a river too deep to afford 
 d footing for the horses, how should it be forded? 
 
 \. With a wide front, so that the mass will impede the cur- 
 l. The troopers on the up-stream flank are less exposed than 
 :hey attempted to pass singly, and those on the down-stream 
 k will pass more easily. 
 
 |>. What precautions must be taken by the troopers? 
 
 Before entering the water they take off their waistbelts and 
 g them around their necks, the sabres fastened to the hooks 
 epi that they will hang dotwn their backs. The earbine is thrown 
 its r the right shoulder, as when preparing to mount. Having 
 ' sred the water, the men draw their knees slightly backward 
 upward, incline their bodies slightly to the front and hold 
 snaffle reins lightly in the left hand, the right hand grasping 
 ly a lock of the mane about halfway up the horse's neok. 
 f they lean backwards, hang to the curb bridle, or seize a lock 
 :h e mane too high up; if they fail to ease the weight upon the 
 
 51 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 horse’s backs — they are liable to pull their horses over backwari 
 and drown both them and their riders. 
 
 Q. If on the bank of a river boats are found, but too small 
 transport horses? 
 
 The men are taken over in the boats, and hold the hor 
 
 by the bridle so that they may follow swimmino. 
 
 Q. Should a pontoon bridge be encountered? 
 
 A. The men are dismounted and required to lead their hor 
 over it. 
 
 Q. If a ferry-boat be found? 
 
 A. The men are dismounted before entering it. 
 
 Q. What does the commander do on reaching the halting-plac 
 
 A. After having received the reports of the officers and ni 
 oomissioned officers charged with procuring lodgings for the co 
 mand in accordance with orders given in advance, he forms 1 
 command in a central place, and gives the necessary ordi 
 
 promptly, so that the horses may be sheltered as soon as possib 
 He sees that the horses are not unsaddled for three or four hou 
 and that they are not watered for at least one hour and a h 
 after the day's march is ended. The officers are required to vi 
 and inspect the horses and stables daily, and the commam 
 
 will make note of the squadrons which continue to have I 
 greatest number of injured horses. If a short halt is mat 
 
 during which the horses are to be fed and watered, only one h 
 of the ration of oats should be fed and the horses should then 
 watered: immediately before resuming the march the other h 
 may be fed. If a detaehment whose horses have not been water 1 
 for some time arrives at a stream which is likely to be the I: 
 one met with during the day, the horses should be quickly water 
 without unbridling, and the march be resumed Immediately aft 
 in order that the horses may not become ohilled. 
 
 Q. Can all these directions be observed in war? 
 
 A. In war one has always to do the best he can. and in f [ 
 best way possible, taking as a rational standard the regulatic - 
 prescribed in peace for preserving the health of horses and m . 
 Near the enemy and on the alert a commander would keep , t 
 columns closed up, have his arms ready, take every means 
 have his command in readiness to meet an attack or repulse o; 
 no matter what unexpected event should occur. 
 
 If compelled, by bad ground, a ford, a narrow bridge, etc., 
 march In single file, the commander of the column should fo 
 his troops successively on the other side of the defile, and 
 sume his march only after the whole command has been prope 
 formed up. If making a night march through a diffcult * 
 wooded country, and there is no object in concealing his man r 
 the commander should assemble the squadron commanders a 
 give them the following instructions, which each one will repi 
 and give to their squadrons on rejoining them; the trumpet 
 will be placed at the heads of their respective squadrons. Tf 
 will repeat every signal, no matter whence it comes. 
 
 The “march" will signify "forward”. 
 
 One note, “halt”. Two notes, that the country is open, z 
 that the command will form close column on first squadron. Th 
 notes, that a squadron has lost the road. Four notes, that . 
 has rejoined. No distance will be left between squadrons. 1 
 officers and non-commissioned officers will march in the colur 
 at the heads and tails of their respective squadrons, and requ 
 the men to ride head to croup, and keep awake. Each squadi 
 will have at its rear an officer and two non-commissioned office 
 whose duty it will be to see that the following squadron does i 
 lose the way. If at a difficult place they discover that they , ~ 
 not followed, they will leave a troorer. who will indicate 1 
 
 52 
 
DETACHMENTS PROPERLY SO CALLED 
 
 position by calling out. As soon as the expected squadron comes 
 d to him he will rejoin his own. If a squadron, by keeping so 
 I ir to the rear, gives reason to fear that it has lost the road, 
 ie officer in rear of the preceding squadron will call out, and 
 is ave the information brought by the trooper left In rear passed 
 om mouth to mouth, until it reaches the head of the oolumn. 
 he commander of the lost squadron will inform the detachment 
 iijmmander of the state of affairs by sounding three notes, which 
 ill be repeated by all the trumpeters. The detachment com- 
 lander will halt the command by having one note sounded. A9 
 ion as four notes have signified the rejoining of the missing 
 i„|uadron, the sounding of the "march” will put the oolumn in 
 ,, otion again. This order having been given, the officers return 
 ,i their posts, and the officers, non-commissioned officers and 
 
 { umpeters are placed as has just been indicated. 
 
 Q. If the commander of a detaohment, in a hostile country, 
 b 'raid of reaching his bivouac at night, and finding no forage 
 , lere, finds along his route some well-filled barns, what should he 
 hij>? 
 
 ,i A. He halts the detachment, places sentinels at the doors 
 
 ,j' the barns, dismounts the command, makes up convenient 
 I usses of forage, which each trooper packs upon his horse. That 
 „)ne, he continues his march. 
 
 UQ. Should a horse, on account of weakness or an accident, 
 
 , )t be able to keep up with the command? 
 
 v . A. Send him to the rear in charge of his rider, who muslt 
 
 ad him. 
 
 J Q. Should the horse be so severely wounded as to be of no 
 Irthur use? 
 
 A. The commander will assemble all the officers and the 
 iterinarian, and if they decide by a unanimous vote that the 
 irse is incapable of further work, he is killed, and his rider, 
 iirrying his equipments, will be sent to the nearest sub-depot in 
 i far. 
 
 11 1 These are general rules, applicable to detachments of every 
 ■ !nd. Circumstances may often compel a modification of the 
 1 anner of applying them. We now pass to special rules. 
 
 mi * * 
 
 DETACHMENTS PROPERLY SO-CALLED 
 
 lo ' 
 
 I Q. What is a detachment properly so called? 
 jfiA. Troops separated by order from the corps to which 
 j ey belong without being sent on reconnaissance, guard duty, 
 itrolling, foraging escort or partisan duty. 
 
 , Q. Explain. 
 
 ‘ A. A commander of a detaohment has his first squadron on 
 I ily at a place a league distant from his. He receives reports 
 jljilch leads him to fear that the detached squadron Is not 
 rong enough to resist an attack with which it is threatened: 
 
 ' sends the second to support it, and places its commander 
 jder the orders of that of the first. This second squadron 
 1 iring its march, is on detached service properly so-called. 
 
 Parts of commands left in rear, at the small depots, are 
 ” dered to rejoin the outposts; they are on detached service 
 operly so-called until they have arrived at their destination, 
 m 
 
 qv * * 
 
 lil 
 
 is I ADVANCE-GUARDS 
 
 ‘ General Steingel, an Alsation, was an excellent hussar officer; 
 
 ; had served under Dumouriez In the northern campaigns, and 
 
 53 . 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 was a clever, intelligent, and extremely vigilant man. To al 
 the characteristics of youth he joined those of mature years 
 he was an ideal outpost general. Two or three days before hi 
 death he was the first to enter Lezegno; the French Geiera 
 whol arrived a few hours later, found that all his wants had 
 been anticipated and everything prepared for his future operations 
 The fords and defiles had been reconnoitred, guides employee 
 the cure and postmaster interrogated, friendly relations estat 
 lished with the inhabitants, spies seit out in various directions 
 the letters in the post-office seized, and all those containin 
 military information had been translated and abstracts of thei 
 contents made, and all necessary measures taken to establis 
 magazines of supplies for the subsistence of the army — Napoleon 
 “Italian Campaigns.” 
 
 What could be added to this admirable portrait of an office 
 of the advance-guard? The whole science of that duty is 
 expressed in those few lines. Learn it by heart; repeat it tei 
 times a day; store it well in your memory, make it a part of you 
 thoughts, absorb the spirit of it so thoroughly that at an 
 instant it may be brought to mind, and then endeavor to emulat 
 the work of Steingel. 
 
 To deserve the title of a good advance-guard officer it i 
 necessary, so to speak, to be capable of commanding the arm 
 for which one clears the way. He should be able to estimat 
 what is required for the deployment of the columns followini 
 him, the positions they will occupy, the wants to be supplie 
 and the attacks they will have to meet. 
 
 The small force which he commands often occupies but 
 small portion of his thought, for it is merely a point in the grea 
 space which demands his attention. He does not act for it, bu 
 for that which follows it. He is not acting individually, lik 
 an officer on a reconnaissance; his troops are merely a part c 
 the whole, and if necessary he must sacrifice them, even to th 
 last man, to hold for his army corps, his division, the key t 
 a pssition, the entrance to a defile, etc. 
 
 His duties are: 
 
 1st. To know well the ground he passes over, under It 1 
 
 offensive and defensive aspects. 
 
 2d. To compel the enemy to deploy and show his strength 
 
 3d. To discover his plans and appreciate their importance 
 and the possibility of executing them. 
 
 4th To prepare, so to speak, for the accommodation of th 
 
 troops he precedes, to obtain for them everything needed in th . 
 way of supplies, and to collect useful information of every kino , 
 There is no chapter of this volume which an officer of the advance . 
 guard may not consult with profit; so I refer him to those whici 
 are concerned with details, and shall confine myself to indi 
 
 eating briefly in this place his duties, and to saying what ha 
 not been said in preceding chapters. 
 
 An advance-guard officer is left, more or less, to himself: h 
 may be ordered to march in such a direction and arrive promptl 
 at such a place, or to follow the enemy prudently, and profit b; 
 his mistakes, taking every possible advantage of them. 
 
 Q. In the first place, what Is he to do? 
 
 A. To execute his orders vigorously. 
 
 Q. In the second? 
 
 A. He feels his way, goes step by step, takes such or such ; 
 route only after having well weighed the consequences of his de 
 cision, compared the special duties of his mission with th 
 relative importance of any check he might experience, the distanc , 
 from his supports, etc. 
 
 His troops march in echelons, and always so that every sub 
 division from the skirmish line to the last files of the rear-guart 
 
 54 
 
ADVANCE GUARDS 
 
 i ill be duly supported. Each platoon, each trooper, even, 
 n ccupies a designated place, and always the one which will con- 
 hi ribute most to the efficiency of the whole force; everything is 
 irulculated beforehand, nothing left to chance, 
 it Every indication is carefully studied. Should he come upon 
 abandoned bivouacs, he reads in the smoking, sometimes blood- 
 s lained, remains the proximity, numbers, losses, fatigue, and 
 ilemoralization of the enemy. 
 
 « Should he see at the forks of a road numerous footprints of 
 ■ jen, wheel-tracks, footprints of horses, he halts, and, from their 
 i!i|reshness, from the reports of the peasants, from the reconnais- 
 sance he sends out, and by his maps, he judges the intentions 
 u F the enemy. 
 
 Q. Should he come upon a defile? 
 
 Ci A. He sends scouts along the heights commanding it, explores 
 with care, but never without forming his troops in rear of it, 
 li j>' as to be prepared in case of a sudden attack. 
 
 :: Q. If he passes through the defile and fears that he may be 
 a ut off and separated by the enemy from his army corps or| 
 it ivision ? 
 
 A. He leaves a sufficient force to hold it until satisfied that 
 re danger of being cut off is passed. 
 
 ! Q. If he arrives in front of a village? 
 
 jl A. He halts his troops and has the place examined by the 
 m bint of his advance-guards; if the enemy is not there, he sends 
 ji ne fourth of his force rapidly through the village to surround 
 :, by posting vedettes at all roads leading out of it in front; 
 nese vedettes are instructed to fall back briskly at the sound of 
 a ie first shot fired. 
 
 Q. If he establishes himself there? 
 i|i A. He seizes the church steeple, in which he posts a sentinel 
 , uring the day; locates his bivouac in a defensive position behind 
 f ie houses on his line of retreat; has provisions and forage 
 brought to it; barricades all the roads by which the enemy might 
 ohe to surprise him, leaving open only a few small passages nec- 
 essary for the retreat of his small posts; he indicates the place of 
 . ssembly in case of alarm, examines all the inhabitants who can 
 ive any information, and seizes some guides whom he keeqs 
 Mth him in his blvouao. 
 
 “ Q. What is an alarm place? 
 
 A. A position considered from a military standpoint, the 
 lost suitable for a general assembly of the troops in case of an 
 'Ttack; consequently, that from which it is best to execute any 
 Movement, either to the front or rear. It is upon this place, 
 ‘hell known in advance, that all the small posts not belonging 
 :t a the advance-guard, properly so called, should immediately 
 1 ssemble in case of an attack. 
 
 ' Q. If the advance-guard arrives in front of a village at night? 
 I! ' A. The commander halts it a few hundred paces in the rear of 
 ie village, and sends a few intelligent troopers to reconnoitre 
 J t. These creep silently up to the first houses, halt, listen, 
 
 ® nd judge by the sounds heard whether the enemy is present or 
 ‘ ot. One of them dismounts, climbs over a hedge, approaches 
 lighted window, looks into the house, and then returns to his 
 orporal, to whom he reports what he has seen. A peasant is 
 eized, and, with a pistol at his head to keep him quiet, is 
 aken to the commander, who questions him. 
 
 Q. If our advance-guard ‘encounters the enemy in the night? 
 A. If the enemy has not discovered it, it halts, keeps silence, 
 tudles him, and under certain circumstances, attacks him unex- 
 ectedly, if a favorable opportunity is offered. 
 
 Q. If the encounter occurs in the day time? 
 
 A. It feels the enemy, makes him deploy, attacks him, while 
 oncealing its own forces and always keeping them in a good 
 
 55 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 defensive position, until the arrival of the proper moment f 
 taking the offensive with its entire forces. 
 
 Q. If the enemy, in retreating, endeavors to destroy a bridg 
 
 A. It drives him away and seizes the bridge. 
 
 Q. Should it drive the enemy back upon a small city? - 
 
 A. It presses him so lively that he will have no time to destr 
 
 the supplies in the place, or carry off men who could give usef - 
 information, or take letters from the post-office, etc. 
 
 Q. If the commander of the advance-guards desires to gi 
 
 the city an exaggerated idea of his force, and of the troops whii a 
 he precedes, in order that the ieport may be carried to the enen 
 and intimidate him? 
 
 A. He brings in by several roads, and unseen by the inhabi ■ 
 ants, a few platoons which represent the heads of columns, h . 
 announces the coming of large bodies, orders a great quant!' s-. 
 of rations, a large number of vehicles, and takes good care ths n 
 the enemy’s spies do not get in rear of him and discov •; 
 the ruse. 
 
 Q. And after having entered the city? 
 
 A. He /selects a good military position and sends out spi< ■ 
 to the front and both flanks. 
 
 Q. If the advance-guard comes to a river? 
 
 A. He reconnoitres its banks and fords, and destroys tf .. 
 latter if of a nature to assist the enemy in attacking or cuttir . 
 off our advancing army. 
 
 Q. If, when the advance-guard reaches one bank of a rive 
 
 the enemy shows himself on the other? 
 
 A. The commander should immediately decide upon the poin 
 likely to be used by the enemy to effect a crossing, and po: . 
 
 troops in front of them to resist the attempts. 
 
 Q. If, at night, a weak advance-guard is in bivouac in fror 
 of the enemy, and wishes to intimidate him? 
 
 A. It resorts to stratagem. A great number of fires ai 
 
 lighted and kept burning brightly the length of a long line, s 
 as to give an exaggerated idea of the force using them. A detacl 
 ment of some fifty troopers is marched round and round the fire 
 so as to give the impression that a long column is arriving t 
 reinforce the command. 
 
 Q. If a night attack is feared? 
 
 A. After the fires have been lighted the commander give 
 
 it out that he will leave in the morning, and then during th 
 
 night moves off silently and takes up a better and unknown pos 
 
 tion well to the rear of his bivouac. The commander of an advance 
 guard should, as a rule, never leave his troops — the place of corn 
 mand; but nevertheless, should he consider it necessary, in order t 
 better inform himself in regard to the situation, to risk hi : 
 
 own personal safety, he must do so only after having wame 
 the second in command, and given him such instructions a 
 will enable him to replace the commander, no matter what ma; 
 happen. 
 
 Q. Before moving out from his army corps or division, wha 
 should the advance-guard commander do? 
 
 A. See that he perfectly understands the orders given hin " 
 by the general, which he should obtain in writing if possible 
 
 he asks the general to repeat such parts of them as are no 
 clearly understood; compare his map with that of the general 
 and correct his own, if necessary; sets his watch by his, and ar 
 ranges with him in regard to the frequency with which report/ - 
 are to be made. 
 
 Q. If the general leaves it discretionary with him as to th/ > 
 time of sending back reports? 
 
 A. Then he makes them frequently, sometimes in writing 
 sometimes verbally; but the latter, be it understood, are entrustec 
 
 56 
 
RECONN 01 SSANCES 
 
 only to officers or intelligent non-commissioned officers, after 
 having had the message repeated to them twice, so that they 
 
 are certain to be delivered with literal fidelity. 
 
 1 “I have arrived at X, — The enemy is in force — He is in position; 
 it is a strong one; he has infantry and artillery. — I need in- 
 fantry. — Shall I remain or withdraw? — My left flank is turned 
 
 and I am obliged to fall back. — I am losing a great many men. 
 — I have taken position at the ravine of Z. — The enemy has 
 lalted. — His infantry is withdrawing; it is a trick. — Numerous 
 oolumns are marching in the direction of Q. — They consist of 
 
 Cavalry only. — The hussars and dragoons which were in front 
 t >f me, have been replaced by the cuirassiers of X and the hussars 
 of Y. — The bridge over the rivers have been broken down. — It 
 vi 1 1 take three hours to repair them. — I have captured two 
 
 Niundred infantry and one piece of artillery from the enemy. — He 
 ■t makes a false move. — He is disconcerted. — He has abandoned 
 Several wagons. — -The enemy is in full retreat, and I am follow- 
 |: ng him, sword in hand. — He will lead me some distance this 
 
 ivening. — The roads I am passing over are unsuited to the 
 >assage of your artillery. — I have scouted the vicinity, but can 
 i-ind no others, etc. (See Reports) 
 
 Q. If the army is in a foreign country? 
 
 , A. The commander should try to obtain from among the 
 r nen of the command some who speak the language of the country 
 r vell; if there are none, he has some ordered to join him, and 
 eeps them near his own person. 
 
 1 Q. What next? 
 
 , A. He makes a rapid inspection of his command, assures 
 Simself that it is in good condition, that it is supplied with am- 
 munition and, if possible, with forage and subsistance; if unac- 
 quainted wUh the officers placed under his orders, he obtains from 
 ' heir immediate commanders what information he can, verbally; 
 j. hen assigns them to the posts where they can be most usefully em- 
 i loyed. (See Chiefs and Officers) 
 
 n: * * 
 
 RECONN 01 SSANCES 
 
 . Every military operation rests, first, upon a thorough knowledge 
 H if the terrain in its offensive and defensive aspects; and, second, 
 'pon that of the position, strength, and, so far as possible, the 
 a Mentions, of the enemy. 
 
 „ It is to obtain this knowledge with some degree of certainty 
 I hat officers are sent on reconnoissance. The command of a re- 
 hi .onnoissance demands a union of military qualities of every de- 
 scription, and indeed necessitates their full employment. Upon 
 j,nknown ground, where one is isolated, he must depend upon him- 
 H plf alone and find in his own powers resources equal to the re- 
 oonsibi I ity and relative importance of his mission. In this 
 hliusiness it is not only a matter of seeing, but of seeing well, ob- 
 irving clearly, So as to avoid furnishing faulty or incorrect in- 
 lit nrmation to the army corps which regulates its movements by the 
 ill ports received from you. 
 
 oi| To reconnoitre, one must undertake the work, relying entirely 
 ilpon himself, for all around him are hostile, and interested in his 
 instruction; and after the completion of his work, one must re- 
 nt hrn without being attacked, much less captured. 
 
 Captured! Frightful idea! What shame is suggested by the 
 Ik ord! How much more bitter still the thought, if the commander 
 a reconnoissance remembers that he is responsible not only for 
 f[ e men of his own command, but also for those of the brigade, 
 
 57 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 division or army corps which his operations should screen and 
 protect. 
 
 The art of withdrawing from a reconnoissance consists, first, 
 in avoiding observation by the enemy, but if it be impossible to 
 escape his lynx eye and prevent a pursuit, the point then is to 
 have so well learned the country passed over in advancing, by 
 observation, information obtained in regard to it, inferences, and 
 by having calculated pretty accurately the disposition and ar- 
 rangement of the troops which may bar our passage that we may 
 follow roads which will throw the pursuers off our track, or 
 reduce, the front of attack so as to make it only equal to that 
 of the defense. 
 
 If, in spite of these precautions the reconnoissance is cut off, 
 after having exhausted all its skill in manoeuvring, then it has 
 recourse to the employment of force. This will not fail of suc- 
 cess if each man is convinced in his own mind of this great truth: 
 
 A mounted man may pass wherever he is determined to go. 
 
 The first care then of a commander of a reconnaissance should 
 be to estimate correctly the strength of his detachment, to hus- 
 band it, to recuperate it in time to always have it, as much as 
 possible, wholly at his disposal. 
 
 I repeat it, the strength of the horse is the trooper’s fortune; 
 if it be all expended in an hour, what will remain? The little 
 which ordinary prudence might have preserved, might have saved 
 his life and been the means of his obtaining the cross of honor. - 
 The officer on reconnoissance, more than any other, should bear 
 this fact in mind. 
 
 He who has a long reconnoissance to make, the duration of 
 which is unknown, should estimate exactly his strength, compare - 
 and adapt it to the demands to be made upon it, and expend no 
 more than is absolutely necessary for the time being. 
 
 Let him not march over soft ground which would fatigue his 
 
 horses, nor double his gait when unnecessary: for the first need 
 
 of a trooper or reconnoissance is a good horse in sound con- 
 dition. Let your action always be the result of cool, clear and 
 prompt reflection. Let the most minute vigilance observe and 
 correct everything which might delay, trammel or divide your 
 action, and thus remove the causes of useless dangers. 
 
 I have already said that the conduct of a reconnoissance de- 
 
 mands a union of all the military qualities of the light-cavalry- 
 man: it will be necessary then for an officer commanding one to 
 study nearly all the chapters of this book. 
 
 As to the topographical work required, I can do no better than 
 to quote literally General La Roche Aymon: “Concisely stated, 
 here are the natural and artificial objects composing the lo- 
 
 calities of the terrain, which should be observed.” 
 
 WOODS 
 
 “Their nature, extent, kind of soil on which they grow; whether 
 they have underbrush; their situation with reference to the roads 
 by which they are reached: whether there are villages withir 
 range of them; whether many roads traverse or cross them; where 
 do they come from and where do they lead.” 
 
 MOUNTAINS 
 
 “Their nature, wooded or open: rocky, earthy or, pebbly, 
 
 whether they command the wood, and on which side; wtiethe 
 
 58 
 
RIVERS AND SMALL STREAMS 
 
 ilopes are steep or aentle; whether the roads by which they 
 ire ascended run straight up or wind along their flanks; if 
 :here are plateaux on their summits, (whether they are wooded or 
 /pen, what is their extent, whether the opposite slope is steep, 
 ind whether they are commanded by higher mountains. 
 
 * * 
 
 RIVERS AND SMALL STREAMS 
 
 ‘‘Their width, and direction with reference to the road; the 
 lature of their banks — whether one commands the other; whether 
 .he stream passes through canons or meadows; whether those 
 meadows are always practicable or only at certain seasons of 
 :he year, during frost or drought; the bridges and fords within 
 ihree miles to the right or left, the names of villages or places 
 lear which they may be found, and whether they are suitable 
 or the passage of artillery?” 
 
 * * 
 
 PLAINS 
 
 “Their approximate extent; about the number of villages that 
 nay be seen on them; the nature of the ground — whether it is 
 ■ imply made up of fields, or rather meadows, ponds, lakes, or mere 
 iooIs mingled together. It may be easily seen how important 
 t is for a body of cavalry which must move with celerity, without 
 eeling its way, to know perfectly in advance the ground upon which 
 t comes, in order not to be arrested in its movements by unfore- 
 seen obstacles; from this it follows that officers and non-oommis- 
 ioned officers charged with making reconnoissance should satisfy 
 :hemselves as to the means by which the fields are enclosed, and 
 mow whether these fields are cut up or subdivided by very wide 
 r deep ditches.” 
 
 ROADS 
 
 “Their nature, whether they run straight or wind about; what 
 orders them to the right and left within cannon range; whether, 
 f closed within gorges, they do not become sunken roads; the 
 vidth of front with which troops can march on them.” 
 
 CITIES 
 
 "Their position; the surrounding localities; whether they have 
 /alls and gates; whether one could establish himself or take up a 
 ood defensive position within them; the roads which lead to 
 nem.” 
 
 MARKET TOWNS AND VILLAGES 
 
 “Their situation; the surrounding localities; the arrangements 
 f the houses — whether they are separated by gardens; wtiether 
 
 I ie gardens are enclosed by hedges, walls, or fences; the number 
 f solid houses, and their location, as well as that of the ohuroh 
 
 59 
 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 and cemetery; whether the cemetery is enclosed by walls; and, .. 
 finally, whether a stream or river runs through or goes around 
 these towns and villages.” 
 
 War has its routine performances also, in spite of the dangers 
 attending them, in spite of the terrible and daily proofs of their ... 
 viciousness, their fatality. Why? For these reasons. The older 
 the armies, the more powerful the sway of routine. If that was , 
 the case when the sound of cannon was heard daily, when every r . 
 day was one of practical instruction, how much more true must 
 it be after fifteen years of peace, with troops of all classes — the 
 very old as well as the very young. 
 
 Routine is the tradional science of mediocrity. The axioms 
 which it bases upon an unreflecting experience are listened to 
 with admiration by those who have as yet seen nothing; for they 
 recount for the benefit of the inexperienced things not found in 
 their books, and assume a dignity and gravity for the respectful ?: 
 listener because of their coming from mouths shaded with long • 
 white mustaches. 
 
 Let us then distinguish between traditions and mere routine, % 
 and, while disregarding the latter, seize with avidity the principles 
 based upon the former. 
 
 One of the routine faults which I have seen committed so often ' 
 in our army, in spite of the frequent and terrible lessons given 
 by its practioe, is, that one cannot make a reconnoissance without 
 attacking the enemy. This absurdly false principle naturally en- 
 tails a series of consequences as false as itself. A large force is 
 always sent on a reconnoissance, and, as a result, the regiments 
 are overworked, difficulties are multiplied and movements delayed; 
 finally, a confidence in one’s strength and an ill-advised pride lead ' 
 to a forgetfullness of the object in view, an unequal combat, an 
 embarrassed retreat, and a complete defeat. 
 
 Many reconnoissances are badly conducted because the numbers 
 engaged are too great to see without being seen, and yet too - 
 feeble to make a successful attack or successfully resist one. ‘ 
 
 The strength of reconnoitring detachment should be great in 
 only one case — that where it is intended to make an attack; • 
 then its number should be as large as possible. 
 
 In every other case they should be composed of a few men only 
 who, intelligent and well mounted, should be able to go any- * 
 where, conceal themselves behind a rock, a clump of bushes, and, 1 
 if pursued, are not obliged to stop, for they can flee more rapidly 
 than the enemy can follow. 
 
 Let us then establish this as a principle; to reconnoitre does 
 not necessarily involve an attack. 
 
 Sometimes a reconnoissance will have to attack the enenty, 
 but only for the purpose of furthering the objeot of the recon- 1 
 noissance; but the attack is not the end, but the means of 
 attaining it. This means should be employed only when the 
 reconnoissance cannot succeed without it. 
 
 If then, at the head of two hundred men, you can better observe 
 the enemy by concealing two of your men in the corner of a wood 
 than by engaging your whole force, employ the first method in 
 preference to the second. 
 
 The most successful reconnoissance is that which collects 
 the greatest amount of information, brings back all its horses and 
 men in good condition; and not that which, mistaking its mission, 
 employs force instead of skill. In my opinion, the officer who 
 resorts to the former is gravely culpable, and should suffer 
 exemplary punishment. 
 
 The Russian light cavalry does not act like ours. During the 
 Russian campaign we had the advance-guard, and were marching 
 from Orcha to Witebsk. On arriving at Babinowistchi we saw 
 near a wood a single Cossack passing through a clearing; we 
 
 60 
 
MARKET TOWNS AND VILLAGES 
 
 ; halted, and formed up for action. A squadron was sent to the 
 clearing and succeeded in capturing two Cossacks, whose horses 
 were exhausted by fatigue; three others escaped. We remained 
 l in position for quite a long time and carefully explored 
 the country, but found no one. The prisoners were interrogated, 
 ; and informed us that five of them had been sent out on a 
 
 ! reconnoissance from Witebsk to Orcha, a distance of twenty leagues 
 1 that they had followed us the whole morning; that not one of 
 " our movements had escaped their notice; the three other Cossacks 
 ! rejoined their troops with the information they had gained, and 
 a few days afterward, at this same Babinowistchi, a reconnoissance, 
 # consisting of two officers and fifty men of our regiment, was 
 
 ! captured in a body by the Russians. 
 
 1 A second fault due to routine, which I have seen commited 
 1 only too often in our army, is the sending out of detachments, 
 
 1 generally composed of the same number of men, at certain specified 
 f hours. When reconnoissances composed of the same number of 
 imen are sent out at the same hours every day, over the same 
 
 i roads, to the same places, their fate may be easily predicted, 
 
 t Reconnoissances should, as far as possible; march so as to 
 be concealed from view. While under cover their rate of march 
 •; may be slower than when on an open plain over which their course 
 i may be easily followed. Hence, when there is any reason to fear 
 ( discovery, plains should be traversed at night; if they must be 
 . crossed in daytime, the command should move at the trot so as 
 i to get out of sight as soon as possible. 
 
 J There is always reason to fear being betrayed to the enemy by 
 the peasants of the country. To diminish this danger the detach- 
 ments should avoid all villages which they are not obliged to 
 pass through or reconnoitre. To do that the detachments should 
 
 I icarry with it provisions and forage for men and horses, make all 
 halts in out of the way places, from which they can see to a dis- 
 tance, and in which dismounted men properly posted (will be a 
 sufficient guard. 
 
 If a reconnoissance must halt in a village, let it be carefully 
 explored before it is occupied. Place flying vedettes on the out- 
 Iside of it, upon the flanks, to arrest all peasants who may attempt 
 1 1 to escape and give information to the enemy. The halt should 
 
 I last only long enough tn allow the place to be examined, to 
 obtain guides and useful information, and procure supplies. 
 
 | If the village is situated in an open plain, let the detachment 
 Ibe assembled at the foot of the church-steeple, where the horses 
 : may be unbridled and fed. A look-out will be placed in the 
 steeple to give timely notice |of- the approach of the enemyj 
 KThis man, and the flying vedettes of whom I have before spoken, 
 will be able to perfectly protect the detachment from surprise. 
 At night the detachment will withdraw from the village, and, 
 
 if it is desired to conceal its route, it will go out on the side 
 [opposite to the direction it intends to take, and will regain the 
 ijilDroper route, by making a detour. The rear-guard will take 
 
 orecautions to see that it is not followed by anyone, 
 ij If the reconnissance is retreating, followed by the enemy, and 
 is compelled to pass through a village, it will do so as rapidly 
 as possible. 
 
 If the reconnoissance has reason to fear an attempt to surprise 
 its bivouac at night, it will light its fires and, afterward with- 
 drawing, will go and establish itself, without fires and without 
 
 loise, at some place several hundred yards from the abandoned 
 jivouac. 
 
 If the reconnoissance marches at night and at a distance from 
 ;he enemy, the guide should be mounted upon a white hoise, which 
 will distinguish him, and which can always be more easily followed 
 :han any other in the darkness. 
 
 61 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 If marching at night and near the enemy, and it is desired tc 
 conceal the movement, no white horses should be allowed with 
 the advance-guard. 
 
 If marching along a paved road, the detachment should keep t< 
 the dirt portions on the sides, so as to muffle the sound of th( 
 horses' feet which might otherwise be heard at a great distance - 
 
 If near the enemy, the men will be forbidden to smoke, as th< 
 fiie in the pipes might illuminate their faces and betray thei i 
 presence. 
 
 Finally, if, near the enemy, it is desired to observe him close 
 ly, the detachment will turn his position, then, halting the mair :. 
 body, detach two or three very intelligent men who, like game : 
 hunters, will creep along silently from shadow to shadow, to con 
 ceal their movements. 
 
 Upon reaching their point of observation they will discover : 
 every thing which it is possible to learn, and then return with 
 their reports, employing in their retreat the same care as ir ■ 
 advancing. 
 
 If the commander of a reconnoissance, after having well esti 
 mated the strength of the enemy, can, without danger, make c 
 few prisoners or alarm the enemy's camp, he should do so, pro- 
 vided that upon his departure from camp discretionary orders wer< 
 given him. In 1814, General Maison ordered an officer of the Rec 
 Lancers of the Imcerial Guard to set out for Lille with a hundrec 
 men to reconnoitre the enemy in Menin, and to bring back minute 
 and definite information in regard to him. The officer left his 
 camp at 2:30 P. M., and the sun was setting when the steeples 
 of Menin appeared in sight. He had perfectly masked the move- . 
 ments of the detachment, which he concealed at a place about a hah 
 league distant from the city. Night, and one of the darkest kind 
 came on when he approached the city with only one platoon, avoid 
 Ing the paved roads, and concealed the platoon within musket range . 
 of the place. He then slipped into the outskirts, accompanied by ■ 
 one officer, one non-commissioned officer, and a trumpeter, dis- 
 mounted, turned his horse over to his orderly, and concealec 
 himself in a ditch near the bridge. The scouting detachments 
 of the enemy re-entered successively and passed close by him. 
 
 In spiie of the darkness of the night, their silhouettes stood ouf 
 clearly against the sky-line so that he counted them man by man 
 and observed the cut of the different uniforms. Possessed of this 
 Information, whioh furnished certain Indications of the number anc 
 composition of the hostile forces, assured that all the scouting 
 parties had re-entered, and that nothing more was to be feared or 
 this side of the river, he sent for a dozen lancers. 
 
 A peasant coming from one of the houses discovered him and 
 wished to give the alarm; he ordered the non-eommissiored officei 
 to seize him, which he did; and holding a pistol to his head, lec 
 him to the rear. The lancers came up silently, and at the Instant 
 when the enemy’s post was about to open the turning bridge h { 
 placed himself at the head of the lancers, charged the post, con- 
 fident of his own security, captured eighteen mounted men, and 
 then made a rapid and successful retreat vlth t-hem. He brought 
 back to his General Information of the most trustworthy kind 
 and that without having even a man wounded. 
 
 In 1809, General Curely, at that time a captain and aid-de-camp 
 with me on the staff of General Edward Colbert, was charged 
 with the duty of reconnoitring the march of the Austrian army 
 which was retreating before our Army of Italy. 
 
 At the head of one hundred troopers he preceded our division 
 at a distance of ten leagues, turned the flank of the Austrians, and 
 moved so secretly to their rear that near the close of the day 
 he had his command secreted in a wood not more than three fourth* 
 
 62 
 

 MARKET TOWNS AND VILLAGES 
 
 , of a league in rear of the village in which the headquaters of 
 the Archduke were established. A great, dusty plain separated 
 him from this village. Two or three Hungarian marauders whom 
 he had arrested gave him much useful information. A large 
 drove of cattle, returning from the fields and moving toward 
 the village, passed near by his place of concealment; he seized 
 
 the herders and kept the cattle in the wood until it was nearly 
 
 dark; then moving it out and putting his troopers, leading 
 
 their horses, in the middle of the herd, he directed the whole 
 towards the village, under the protection of the thick cloud of 
 1 dust which was raised by the moving mass. The night, the 
 
 T! : dust, the weariness of the enemy’s troops, the absence of any 
 
 fear among the Austrians of an attack from the side from which 
 the herd came, served the design of Curely so well that he 
 
 penetrated the centre of the village, and with his own hand shot 
 one of the sentinels of the Archduke, the commander-in-chief. 
 
 At this signal his men mounted their horses, and after having 
 used their sabres for some minutes and profiting by the aston- 
 ishment and confusion of the enemy, left the village, and on 
 the following day rejoined Colbert’s brigade without having lost a 
 i man or a horse. The position of the headquarters of the Aus- 
 : trian army, having been definitely located, gave reliable indi- 
 
 . cations of the whereabouts of our Army of Italy, which we joined 
 n two days afterward, and with it had the combats at Karako, 
 Pappa and Raab. 
 
 After these two examples, for whose historical accuracy I can 
 vouch, I believe it would be well to give one a little more In de- 
 tail, which we can follow in the map annexed to the chapter on 
 Topography. 
 
 Captain A, sent to the headquarters of the division, receives 
 the following order: 
 
 “Captain A will set out at once with one hundred men of the 
 8 Eighth Hussars. 
 
 He will reconnoitre the small town of Neustadt. 
 
 If the enemy occupies the town, he will try to capture and 
 bring back some of them. 
 
 He will obtain information of the Prussian army corps which 
 should have arrived near that place. 
 
 He will carefully examine and report upon the country passed 
 over, its configuration, the nature and conditions of its roads, 
 bridges, watercourses, etc. 
 
 He will rejoin by 10 A. M. tomorrow. 
 
 General, etc. 
 
 Bivouac near Grossthurm, 5 A. M., June IS, 1892. 
 
 [ The captain, after having received this order from the general, 
 makes a tracing of the country he is to pass over from the 
 headquarters map. Then he assumes command of the detachment, 
 which has been detailed by the adjutant. He inspects his de- 
 tachment, sees that the cartridge-boxes are in good condition, the 
 horses well shod, that the wallets contain bread and oats, and 
 
 then moves the command out in columns of twos. He halts, and 
 
 allows the detachment to file by him. Three horses are limping, 
 two are too weak to keep up, others are known to neigh; some 
 dogs have joined the detachment; these are all sent back and 
 
 left at the bivouac. 
 
 As soon as he has got beyond the outposts and line of patrols, 
 he halts, has the girths tightened, removes the pennons from the 
 lances, slings musketoons, turns back the Schabraques and places 
 some Alsatians at the head of the column, with orders to speak 
 i nothing but German. Among the Alsatians there is an officer 
 
 whom he orders to ride by his side, putting a non-commissioned 
 officer in command of his platoon. 
 
 63 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 The officer next in rank to the commander will ride at the’ 
 tail of the column to see that it is kept closed up. 
 
 The advance-guard is composed of ten men, commanded by an 
 Alastian non-commissoned officer, and marches one hundred paces 
 in advance of the detachment. 
 
 As the country is open, the ground wet, and the march must: 
 be rapid, he detaches no flankers as they would only fatigue their I 
 horses and delay the march for nothing. 
 
 The rear-guard, composed of a corporal and four men, marches* 
 fifty paces in rear of the column. 
 
 The advance-guard appears to hesitate; the captain forms fours, i 
 and separates his platoons so that they will be a hundred paces! 
 apart and on the right-hand side of the road, their right flanks I 
 resting on the ditch. He halts the column and sends to inquire 
 the cause of the advance-guard’s halting; some troopers have been) 
 seen, but have proved to belong to one of our returning reconnois- 
 sances. He questions its commander, but he has been in a direc- 
 tion different from that in which we are going, and knows nothing 
 of interest except that some of the enemy’s patrols — from twelve 
 to twenty-five men — have been seen on the Ingoisheim road, about 
 a league from where we now are. 
 
 He closes his column again and resumes the march. The 
 aspect of the country begins to change; it becomes broken, and 
 some hills which command the plain are seen on the right. The 
 captain detaches three well-mounted men to follow the summits ( 
 of these hills and flank the detachment. At the end of two hours' - 
 marching the extremity of the plateau is reached. A large, rich 
 valley lies at his feet. A cross-roads, where four roads join, is 
 seen; the first, to the right, is metalled, and must be that of 
 Ingoldsheim; the second is only a small dirt road, which winds I 
 along the mountain, and seems, in crossing the plain, to lead to- 
 wards the woods, which follow and enclose the right-hand side I 
 of the valley. The third is a metalled road which continues the 
 Ingoldsheim road on to Meustadt by the way of Berndorf. 
 
 Consulting his map, the captain is convinced that he is not 
 mistaken; in fact, it shows the extremity of the plateau and the 
 cross-roads two leagues distant. He has marched two hours. It 
 shows Berndorf two miles in front in the valley, and at the left- 
 hand extremity of the plateau, and at that distance a village is 
 visible. 
 
 The officer says in good German to the peasant, “Comrade, have 
 you seen any of our people? Who are your people? Why, our 
 brothers, the Prussians. No; but I know that some of them have* 
 arrived at Neustadt and Baumdorf. And the French? Ah, the 
 scoundrels, they say that ten thousand of their cavalry are at 
 Grossthurm. So many as that? Yes, at least. Well we are going 
 to rejoin our comrades at Neustadt; which way must we go? Go 
 dow'n that road there. This one? No; that goes to Ingoldsheim. 
 That one? No, that is a small road which leads through the 
 woods by Baumdorf; but take the other, which is metalled, and 
 will lead you to the village which you see yonder. Yes, I see, 
 the one near the mountain? No; that is Bonn, but farther to the' 
 right in the valley. There? Yes, that is Berndorf. Is it far off? 
 Two leagues. And from Berndorf to Neustadt how far? In five 
 hours' riding you will reach it. Thanks; good-by.” The captain 
 has then made no mistake. He reflects: the enemy is in the 1 
 vicinity, he must have some posts in the valley, but as it is now 
 broad daylight the movement of the detachment cannot be con- 
 cealed, especially if it follows the highway; the horses will soon 
 need rest; the woody curtain on his right which follows the line ' 
 of the valley and extends as far as Baumdorf may be used to mask 
 
 64 
 
MARKET TOWNS AND VILLAGES 
 
 s march, he does not hesitate, but turning to the right along the 
 irt road, he descends the mountain and crossing the plain at a 
 ot, reaches the wood. 
 
 He follows the paths which he thinks run in the direction of 
 ie march he has to make. His pocket compass aids him, and, in 
 efault of that, the sun. The valley which he sees to his left 
 trough the opening in the wood will prevent his wandering off 
 >o far to the right. His march is made in silence. His men 
 mverse only in low tones, and adjust their arms so that they 
 ill not rattle against the buckles of their belts, strike their 
 irrups, spurs, etc.; here the difficulties of the ground compel 
 e men to dismount, but they double the gait when they remount, 
 hese movements are all executed without command, eaoh one 
 Mowing the example set by the head of the column. 
 
 The column marches as well closed up as possible; the advance 
 id rear guards are well drawn in. 
 
 It is five hours since the command left Grossthurm; the place 
 here it finds itself at present is unfrequented, and the shade of 
 lie wood is thick. The captain leaves the path, enters an open- 
 g surrounded by heavy shrubbery, and dismounts, 
 i Two sentinels, looking in different directions, are posted so as 
 i see everything without being seen; one half of the horses are 
 i ibridled and fastened to trees, and allowed to eat grass, oats 
 such leaves as they can reach without being untied; the men, 
 front of their horses, their bridles on their arms, eat their 
 eakfast in silence. 
 
 During the march, the captain has not neglected to make ob- 
 rvations which, in case of the non-success of his undertaking, 
 II save him if obliged to return by the road on which he came. 
 
 I le connected sketch he has draiwn in his pocket-book, the broken 
 i anches left at the entrance to the woods, his recollections of 
 e features of the country, are all guides to be used on his re- 
 rn. At 1 P. M. the command is remounted and resumes the 
 jrch. The ground is rough, and at 6 P. M. the horses are very 
 inch fatigued, when the road to Baumdorf is encountered. What 
 all the captain do? 
 
 He is still two leagues from Neustadt. He does not know 
 lether the enemy occupies that place in force or not; the de- 
 . ihment is tired, and if he were obliged to execute a retreat 
 s der the fire of fresh troops, he would without doubt suffer serious 
 ■ses; on the other hand, should he march directly on Neustadt 
 ! would arrive there just, at dusk, at a time when the oavalry is 
 
 r vays on its guard; if he halts where he is without resting or 
 
 i iding his horses, his prospects will be no better. 
 
 ■ He conceals himself near the road, and soon seizes a man 
 ssing by, and tells him that if he makes any outory*he will 
 !>ot him on the spot. “You come from Neustadt.? Yes. Are 
 1 1 Prussians there? Yes. Cavalry or infantry? Cavalry. About 
 w many men? I don’t know. Is there a village near here? 
 thin a quarter of a league. Any isolated farms? Several. Are 
 i well acquainted with them? Yes. How are their buildings 
 
 -anged, and where are they? There Is a rich one near the 
 
 lage, and it can be entered easily, because it has no enclosed 
 Jrt. And the other? It is three-fourths of a league from the 
 lage and half a league from here, situated upon the border of 
 i wood and the marsh on the side of Neustadt; it is not so 
 h as the first named; it has a court surrounded by high walls 
 1 closed by a great gate; it is about a league and a half from 
 ustadt. Lead us to that one.” 
 
 Then the captain, having seen that no one was passing along 
 road rides along it rapidly, and, re-entering the forest, follows 
 
 65 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 his guide, whom he has secured by one arm and placed in char 
 of a sergeant and corporal. He halts at two hundred steps fro 
 the farm-house, reconnoitres its approaches, surrounds it quick 
 and resuming his march, enters the courtyard. 
 
 A peasant who is trying to escape is brought back to him 
 one of his men belonging to the cordon which he had post 
 around the place. This peasant, -with all those belonging to f , 
 farm, and the guide, are locked up in a cellar, and a sentir < 
 
 posted at the door of it. The gates of the farm are closed, a 
 
 interior sentinels placed over those opening out into the counti , 
 Four men are placed in hiding at the windows, where a vii 
 
 to a distance can be had, and on the four sides of the enclosui i 
 The horses are unbridled and fed, and the men also eat a 
 sleep. Night has come, no light illumines the windows, a 
 silence reigns in the detachment. 
 
 A patrol of five Prussian troopers passes in front of the hous ■ 
 the men placed at the windows have given warning of th' \ 
 
 approach. Is it an advance guard? The men have quickly bridl 
 the horses, mounted them, and have formed line in the courtyai ^ 
 sabres in hand. The order is given “In case the enemy shou . 
 be in force and wish to enter, to throw open the gates, ma 
 a vigorous sortie, and take again the route by which the detat 
 ment came.” 
 
 The patrol is followed by no one; shall it be captured? N 
 because some pistol shots would be fired and carry the alai 
 to a distance. The patrol wishes to enter and knocks at the gal 
 no one answers; it insists; the Alsatian officer, imitating as w 
 as he can the accent of the country, answers that he will n 
 open the door, and that, if the patrol insists further, he w 
 complain to their officers on the following day. The patrol go 
 away swearing. The troopers dismount, unbridle their hors 
 and feed them. 
 
 The captain questions, one after another and separately, t 
 people of the farm, after having forewarned them that if th 
 attempt to deceive him by their answers, their lives will p 
 the forfeit. He learns that a hundred Prussian Hussars are 
 Neustadt; that they have come from Freythal, a city formei 
 fortified, still surrounded by a low wall, and about eight leagu 
 distant; that they are bivouaced in rear of the town; that th 
 have a grand guard of twelve men on the Baumdorf road, a 
 a post of five men on that of Weg; that they send out patrc • 
 in the direction of Bonn, Baumdorf and Berndorf; that the 
 patrols are of from twelve to fifteen men; that they set o 
 ordinarily at four o’clock A.M. and five P.M., and return aft 
 an absence of two or three hours. 
 
 At two o'clock in the morning the captain has his hors: 
 bridled, sees that they are prope-ly saddled and girthed, that t 
 wallets contain some provisions and a ration of oats, and th 
 some bundles of forage, well tied up, are fastened on the valise 
 then releasing one of the peasants from confinement, he mak 
 him mount one of the farm horses, and practising, in regard 
 him, what has been prescribed to the chapter on guides, plac 
 him at the head of the detachment and proceeds to conceal t 
 command in the little wood a quarter of a league in rear 
 Neustadt. 
 
 His men dismount, hold their horses by their bridles a 
 preserve the most perfect silence. 
 
 At five o'clock — that is to say, one hour after the time whi 
 it is presumed the enemy's reconnaissance will set out — the c 
 tachment is mounted, approaches Neustadt as secretly as possib 
 then, when within view of the place, takes a fast trot, dra< 
 sabre, takes the gallop, charges upon the bivouac, and carries < 
 men and horses. The captain seizes the letters in the post-offic 
 
 66 
 
REPORTS 
 
 and makes two of the principal men — the postmaster and the 
 ■burgomaster — prisoners. He mounts them on two of the captured 
 Ihorsco, and starting off at a fast trot along the road to Baum- 
 dorf, takes the walk only when turning to the right into that of 
 tBerndor.f. 
 
 i The disarmed prisoners, mounted on captured horses, which 
 are led by troopers, march in the centre of the column. The ad- 
 ivance-guard, composed of one officer and twelve men, marches 
 rone hundred and fifty paces in advanoe; the rear-guard, an officer 
 and twenty-five men, follows the column at the same distance, 
 i The captain carefully examines the road which he passes over, 
 ■and concerning which he is to furnish exact information to the 
 'general. He halts only a few minutes at Berndorf, in order to take 
 a new guide and make a few notes; then, fearing to go to the 
 Icross-roads, recognized in his advance, knowing that it must nec- 
 fessarily be the principal objective point of the enemy’s reconnais- 
 sances he turns to a neighboring road on the right., crosses the 
 ‘plain, and climbs the mountain. Upon reaching its summit he 
 'establishes his command in a place to one side of the road, be- 
 hind some hills which will hide it from view on the side of 
 Ingoldsheim, and posting concealed sentinels to watch the plain 
 and the valley, he orders the horses to be fed. During this time 
 he questions his prisoners, writes his report, which will be found 
 in the following chapter, and completes the sketch occompanying 
 this chapter. When the horses have finished eating, he remounts 
 ithe command, and by a detour regains the Grossthurm road, A 
 quarter of a league from his bivouac he has the pennons placed 
 on the lances, and then, without changing the order of the march, 
 he approaches our outposts and returns to the regiment, presents 
 the captured horses to the colonel, and conducts the prisoners, 
 dismounted, to the general, to whom he delivers his report. 
 
 REPORTS 
 
 Reports are of two kinds — verbal and written. The first are 
 made on returning from a reconnaissance or a mission and are sent 
 )y an officer or non-commissioned officer detached from the ad- 
 it fance-guard for that purpose. They should be short, and therefore 
 11 for important missions they are generally insufficient; they should 
 always be accompanied by written reports, to which they become 
 ■in excellent complement. 
 
 i I know that written reports are difficult to obtain from officers, 
 >ecause their early training before the war has not prepared them 
 or such work — a serious fault in a course of military training, 
 war the inaccuracy of an officer in writing, or his delay in 
 amending in his report, is a fault grave enough to deserve severe 
 junishment. 
 
 Reports are as indispensable to the general-in-chief as a map of 
 he country in which he is operating; it is by means of them that 
 re receives his information; without them he can direot nothing. 
 Q. What are the most important features of a report? 
 
 A. Scrupulous exactness in regard to statements, simplicity, 
 learness of expression, neatness of the writing, and correct spell- 
 ng of proper names. 
 
 Q. Should a report contain nothing but iwhat the writer knows 
 jiimself ? 
 
 A. It may contain both what is actually known sind what is 
 nere'y reported or heard, but the two kinds of information must 
 lis >e kept entirely distinct; thus, for example, one should not say: 
 td j‘I have arrived at the village of Loevenstein; the enemy appeared 
 
 67 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HANDBOOK 
 
 there this morning but retreated to the town of GreifTenstein;’ 1 
 but “I arrived, at half-past nine this evening, at the village oT 
 Loevenstein, where I found no enemy. The burgomaster told me 
 and his report has been confirmed by the individual reports oil 
 different people, that twenty-five Austrian uhlans (kurtka greer 
 red and gold-yellow schapska), fifty curassiers (white coats 
 facings and collars amaranth), and fifty light cavalry (white coats 
 facings and collars sky-blue) arrived at Loevenstein at seven o’clock 
 this morning, refreshed themselves, and then withdrew to Greiffen- 
 stein. The uniforms named led me to believe that the uhlans 
 belong to the regiment Merfeld the cuirassiers to that of Albert 
 and the light cavalry to that of Colloredo. Greiffenstein appears 
 to me to be too far away for these troops to have retreated to it > 
 
 "Later information leads me to believe that these troops turnec 
 off the road leading to Greiffenstein, at a point a league distam 
 from here to go to Kirstein, where, it is said, there is a divisior 
 of Austrian cavalry. I shall allow my horses only a few hours of 
 absolutely necessary rest, and at three o'clock tomorrow morning 
 shall set out to verify these leports.” 
 
 In this example, that which is known postively — that is, the! 
 arrival of the detachment at Loevenstein — is affirmed; that re- 
 lating to the movements of the Austrian cavalry is stated merely 
 as a report, in which confidence may be placed; that referring tc 
 the route by which the Austrian cavalry executed its retreat, is t 
 supposition of the commander of the reconnoissance, to which thi 
 general will attach more or less importance according to the de- 
 gree of confidence he has in the officer, and its agreement with the 
 reports received from other sources. 
 
 Q. Should reports be made frequently? 
 
 A. That depends partly upon the importance of the informatior 
 to be furnished; and partly upon the difficulty of transmitting it- 
 thus, an advance or rear guard should send reports more frequently 
 than would be expected of a reconnoissance, because their com- 
 munication with the army is easy, and the information furnishec 
 has a more immediate and pressing interest. Often a reconnois 
 sance is forbidden to send in any reports. The oders received or 
 setting out will determine the nature and frequency of reports. 
 
 Q. What precautions are to be observed in sending in reports? 
 
 A. If I am far from my division or brigade, and fear that the 
 enemy may capture my messenger, I select a well-mounted and 
 intelligent man from the command, and give him a tracing from 
 the map of the country he is to pass over. I indicate to him or 
 
 this tracing the dangerous places he must avoid, then, in addition 
 
 to the written report, I give him verbally such information as I 
 think necessary, which he will repeat to the officer to whom hr 
 is sent. To make certain that he understands the message thor- 
 oughly, I make him repeat it twice, and order him to deliver II 
 exactly as be has received it. 
 
 The report is written in a fine hand, on a small piece of paper 
 which he carry in his glove. If attacked and in danger ol 
 being oaptured, the paper will be swallowed. The barrel of i 
 pistol is a good place in which to carry a report; rolled into B 
 
 ball and twisted up in another piece of paper to protect it, II 
 
 is disposed of like a wad, and, if the messenger sees that he can-: 
 not save it, as a last resort, he discharges the pistol, and thus 
 destroys the report. 
 
 Often, when there is danger of a messenger’s being cut off 01 
 captured by the enemy, a small escort is sent with him part ol 
 the way; but these escorts should be sparingly used, for they j 
 weaken the reconnoissances and impede their movements. 
 
 If it is of great importance that the report should get to Its 
 
 68 
 
COMMANDS TO BE USED IN WAR 
 
 address, and capture is feared, two messengers should be sent by 
 > different routes. 
 
 Q. Should a report go into details? 
 
 A. Yes; and for that reason notes should be taken in proportion 
 ilto the duration of the expedition so that they will serve to make 
 i it clear; then nothing will escape, the statements are generally 
 1 correct, and the memory thus assisted is not compelled to make 
 ■ an effort to recall, in a vague iway, things based only on a con- 
 v fused recolle;tion of them. 
 
 A report should not, however, embrace a lot of idle remarks of 
 interest to the commanding general. Often, an officer in 
 writing his report gives a detailed account of his halts, his anx- 
 ieties, his marches, and countermarches, which is simply a waste 
 of time and ink. What the general wants is the result of the 
 reconnoissance, in the sense of the execution of the orders given, 
 Q. Write out the report of the reconnoissance which is de- 
 scribed in the preceding chapter as having been made by Captain 
 V 
 
 1 COMMANDS TO BE USED IN WAR. POSITIONS TO BE TAKEN 
 ON THE BATTLEFIELD, AND MOVEMENTS TO BE EXE- 
 CUTED THERE. 
 
 Q. What should be the first care of a commanding officer? 
 
 A. To accustom his men to observe perfect silence at the com- 
 nand “Attention!” This indispensable condition will be obtained 
 ilfvith ease under the most trying circumstances if the commander 
 s able to impress his men with confidence and personal attach- 
 :r nent for him. 
 
 Q. And the second? 
 
 4 A. To require every officer, non-commissioned officer, and 
 private to remain exactly in his proper place in ranks, and not 
 o leave it under any pretext. 
 
 Q. What should be the nature of commands? 
 
 A. Clear, plain, and above all, suited to the occasion, 
 u | Q. In order that they may be clear and distinct, reach 
 in from one end of a line to the other, and be as effective at the 
 nd as at the beginning of an affair, what precautions should 
 
 e taken? 
 
 A. The commander uttering them should consider three things; 
 st, he should know what pitch of his voice is the most sonorous, 
 nd the least fatiguing to him. 2nd. The range of his voice, 
 rd. The effects of accidental causes — such as wind, physical 
 
 bstacles, the roar of cannon, the breaking of the lines, the 
 <citement of the men produced by favorable or unfavorable events 
 ihich may disturb them or distract their attention — should de- 
 jrmine the choice of the place from which the commands must 
 given, so as to be clearly and generally heard. 
 
 0- And the suitableness of the commands given? 
 
 A. Ah! That is a display of the possession of the genius for 
 
 *|ar, the distinguishing mark of the entire soience. The officer 
 ho gives suitable commands only is like the helmsman who, 
 i a tempest, when within a single step of a rock, gives the 
 Her one thrust and saves the ship. On the fitness of a single 
 immand may depend the safety of a whole regiment of cavalry — 
 Ityjjs glory or its shame. 
 
 0- From what then is this instinct of fitness derived? 
 
 A. First, from a strong character, which is surprised by 
 othirig, which acts the more cooly as circumstances seem 
 ore unfavorable; then the habit of constantly observing the 
 
 69 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 enemy, which enables us to know him as well as though we wer 
 in his camp, in his ranks; enables us to divine the intentions o 
 his leaders, and soldiers even, so that, upon his making . 
 movement, we can be perfectly confident of what will follow. 
 
 There are some officers who think the tone of command should 
 be an artificial one; they are wrong. There is no necessity o 1 
 assuming a deep tone, and provider that is not absurdly share 
 the only condition requred is that it shall be sonorous. A 
 artificial tone has two inconveniences; first, it tires the voic; 
 second, it is apt to vary. In war the first is a serious objection 
 and the second not less so, for there may be a thousand un 
 expected, hurried occasions, where, as at night, in a hand-to-hanr 
 fight it is necessary that the voice of a chief should be recognize 
 as soon as heard. Our men should be accustomed to the unvarying 
 inflection of our tones of command; these inflections alone art 
 for ears accustomed to them, a preparatory command for th 
 movements about to be executed, and indications of the rapidit! 
 required. 
 
 Thus, for example, if marching in line and you wish to hal 1 
 the command slowly, prolong the preparatory command “Squac ^ 
 ron!”; if, on the contrary, you wish to halt it suddenly, give th 
 command sharply. In commanding a large body of troops i 
 war it is a good thing to add signals to the commands. Thus 
 for example, in the case cited above, at the command "Squadrons!* 
 raise your sabre vertically; at the command "Halt!’’ lower i- 
 and let the rapidity of these signals correspond to the livelines* 
 of the commands. 
 
 If you give a command to gain ground to the right or left 
 at the command "Platoons right!” (or left) indicate with you< 
 sabre the flank to which you are going to march. 
 
 This habit once acquired, may be of the greatest utility i 
 certain cases where, commanding several squadrons, the wind ma* 
 carry our voice away from the troops, or the distance or nois 
 may prevent their hearing it; then our signals will powerfull 
 supplement the unheard words of command, and alone direc 
 an important movement. 
 
 When the commander of several squadrons wishes to breat 
 his line by platoons right or left and continue the march, c 
 cause the line to move to the rear by platoons, right or let 
 about, it is not necessary that the command “Forward!" whicr 
 he is going to give, should be delayed, as the drill regulation 
 prescribe, for peace evolutions, and, consequently be given i 
 the same time as that of the squadron commanders, but it shoult 
 be given immediately after the squadron commanders comman 1 
 “March!” This promptness is the more necessary because th* 
 terrain of war is so uneven that it does not admit of the math* 
 matical precision of movement practiced on the drill ground 
 some squadrons may be delayed, others waver in their movements 
 while, if the command be indicated in advance, the altenticl 
 of the squadron commanders will be given only to the executior 
 which will necessarily gain in simplicity, uniformity, and exactness 
 
 The art of manouvring on the battlefield consists in bein 
 always prepared, in never being surprised or crowded, in spitn 
 of one's self, by the enemy; in profiting by all the accidents ol 
 the ground, by every event that may assure one's superiority, i 
 is a game of chess that is played; .to win it, it is necessary t 
 study the situation well, and move only when the chances ar 
 all in one's favor. As soon as an officer recognizes his oppoij 
 tunity, observation should stop and action begin. 
 
 In war the worst thing an officer can do is to do nothing 
 hesitation is worse than ignorance — it is the stamp of weaknes 
 The game is never lost, for frequently an audacious resolutio 
 may turn the tide. To determine what should be undertake 
 and what should be avoided, is genius. 
 
 70 
 
COMMANDS TO BE USED IN WAR 
 
 On the battlefield the true manoeuverer has sized up his enemy 
 mg before sabres have been crossed. The exactness, uniformity, 
 ood arrangement of his movements, their calmness under artillery 
 re have already given the exact measure of the chief, of the 
 
 i (Idler, with whom he has to deal. These indications should 
 Lt be lost, but exercise a determining influence upon his actions. 
 
 Let us remember that the opinion we form of our adversary 
 ( ; the counterpart of that he forms of us. The more favorable 
 : e make the latter, the more we shall disquiet him, and even 
 Jfamoralize him, before making a serious attack. If we obtain 
 Jlis immense advantage over him by this single fact, we shall 
 r icrease our own strength by that which he has lost. 
 
 « Q. On the battlefield is there a choice to be made of the 
 olutions theoretically taught? 
 
 A. Yes; certainly; for several of them, if used in battle, might 
 mpromise us dangerously. Even out of reach of the enemy 
 ere is no sense in complicated evolutions, and I repeat that 
 these that uselessly fatigue the horses should be suppressed 
 nj)ar the enemy there is still less reason for these evolutions, 
 cause they can never be executed with the calmness and 
 Irecision that obtain on the drillground, and might leiad 
 our being suprised and cut to pieces while in a dangerous 
 rmation. 
 
 Q. What do you understand by complicated movements? 
 
 A. All those composed of two distinct movements, such 
 , for example, "changing front on the centre”, “faced to the 
 sr in line,” etc. 
 
 Q. But, nevertheless an occasion may present itself of forming 
 ,«ine faced to the rear, on the rear of the column? 
 
 A. In that case divide the movements. First comand, Pla- 
 ons Right About or Left About; then the column facing in the 
 n iw direction, command, 1 Front into Line; thus there will be 
 ill f error or hesitation, and you will secure uniformity and certainty, 
 ill |Q. Which, then, are the most certain movements in war? 
 u |A. All those whose execution is the simplest and the most 
 lited which require the fewest commands, whose mechanism 
 rs a familiar and ordinary; and consequently are made without 
 ,manding too much mathematical calculation; finally, those 
 li (lich are executed by uniform movements from the head to the 
 M lil of the column, or from the right to the left of the line, 
 lit iius, for example, being near the enemy, it would be better to 
 ' mmand, Platoons Right, Head of Columns Left, than Squadrons, 
 >i ireak by Platoons. .Since it is dangerous to break from line 
 mi to column at a short distance from the enemy, and to thus 
 Impose your command to an attack in flank, you must, if compelled 
 ill i do so, make the duration of this dangerous state of affairs as 
 
 ii lort as possible; therefore, when you have to resume your front, 
 ei! i will be better to command, Platoons, Right (or Left), Halt; 
 i,S jilumn. Halt; Platoons, Right (or Left) into line, Wheel; as 
 ilij fu will not only gain time, but come to a halt in line. 
 
 m 'Countermarches should be avoided, and, as far as possible, 
 k) jjvements by fours should be prohibited, because a single 
 ip| hnon-ball would knock one of them out of all recognizable shape, 
 li. t the platoon be the unit. 
 
 Q. You have said that changes of front on the centre should 
 iy Wit be executed; with what would you replace them? 
 
 A. The principal objections to formations or changes on the 
 III itre are that they necessitate four movements and the march 
 | columns, as well as formations in inverse order which puts 
 til p whole order of the regiment at the mercy of the coolness, 
 .is It of the captain only, but of a chief of a platoon or single 
 yti i of men. 
 
 Ill iln war you almost always have more space than is needed 
 your deployments, especially when you are in position; the 
 
 71 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 mathematical limits assigned you on the drill ground no long* 
 exists, so you can have elbow-room; it is better to execute yoi 
 changes of front on one of the flanks than the centre; it is eve 
 better for a regiment of two, three, or four squadrons to whe« 
 In line at a trot, pivoting on one of the flanks, than to whe< 
 by platoons to the right and then partially reform. 
 
 Q. I thought this movement was slower than that given I 
 the drill regulations? 
 
 A. You were mistaken, for the points of departure and arriv; 
 and the ground being the same, there is no reason to think sc 
 and under the fire you will find in it a great advantage — that c 
 executing a single command, and being formed during the who 
 time of the movement. 
 
 As a general rule, when you are near the enemy and in 
 good formation, break it only for good reasons, and then sul 
 divide your command as little as possible, so that each portic 
 may preserve an intrinsic force sufficient, in case of a suddc 
 attack by the enemy, to oppose to him a respectable resistanc 
 
 The terrain of war differs from the drill ground in that on i 
 the object is not to execute evolutions, but to take up position 
 There the theoretical letter of precept disappears to make plac 
 for the serious business of application. 
 
 Look then only to the end to be attained. If you can accor 
 plish it by replacing complicated evolutions by simple movement 
 do not hesitate to do so. Execute only those which your me 
 know, so as to speak, too well, and in which it is impossible fi 
 your officers or soldiers to make any mistakes; for it is necessar 
 I repeat, that your foresight should always make allowance fi 
 excitement, which harmonizes very poorly with difficulty. 
 
 I shall go still further and say that, as a man is more a 
 customed to using his right hand than his left, so a regimer 
 will manoeuvre better by the right than by the left; profit the 
 by this observation for use in emergencies which demand the exe 
 cise of undisturbed coolness and self-confidence. 
 
 0- I thought that the regulations had provided for everythin' 
 and that nothing not contained in it was to be executed on tt 
 battlefield? 
 
 A. Upon that terrain must be executed any evolution demand* 
 by necessity. The regulations could not and should not provlc 
 for every case that might arise: consider it, then, as a class 
 model only, from which one must not vary without necessity, bi 
 not as infallible gospel, outside of the literal observance of whic 
 there is no salvation. 
 
 Again, I shall take another case which frequently occurs ! 
 war; suppose your regiment marching in an open plain, in ec 
 elons of squadrons at full distance; at some distance a defi 
 as wide as the front of a squadron appears suddenly in the froi 
 of the first. It is necessary to pass it promptly. Would you gh 
 the commands prescribed in the regulations: Squadrons, Hal 
 Squadrons, In Line March; On First, Squadron, Form Clo: 
 Column, March; then finally, Column, Forward March? Would 
 not be more speedy and simple to command without halting, Clo 
 Column on First Squadron, Trot, March? There is no haltin i 
 no time lost; the squadrons, by platoons, right wheel, come 
 take their places in the column. 
 
 Debouching from the defile, if you think it advisable, you C£ 
 resume your march in echelon, without halting, at the comman 
 In Echelon, At Full Distance, Deploy Column, which is execute 
 by inverse means. 
 
 Should the defile be in front of any other than the first squa 
 ron, as your squadrons are at full distance, you can form tl 
 column on that squadron by the same movements, doubling tl 
 gait. 
 
COMMANDS TO BE USED IN WAR 
 
 Q. Which is the best position in action? 
 
 A. That which gives us the advantage of the ground for at- 
 tack and defense. 
 
 Q. In what consist the principal qualities of a good position? 
 
 A. In having the flanks supported by obstacles Which the 
 enemy cannot pass, a safe route of retreat to the rear, in front 
 of it a train commanded by the position which, while opposing 
 difficulties to the enemy, permits, on the contrary, the instan- 
 taneous employment of our troops. 
 
 Q. Do you not generally take position on high ground? 
 
 A. Yes; because one can see better around him, because the 
 
 slopes offer additional difficulties to the enemy, and because the 
 
 enemy’s view not being directed downward upon us, we can 
 establish our lines and group our forces without being per- 
 ceived, behind the curtain formed by t h e crest of the hill. 
 
 Q. If the terrain on which you find yourself forced to take 
 position has some disadvantages? 
 
 A. Lose no time in determining what they are, and then remedy 
 them by making a suitable disposition of your troops. 
 
 Q. What are capital defects in a position? 
 
 A. A position may be advantageous as regards its front, but 
 
 afford protection to only one of our flanks, which is the more 
 
 dangerous, as an attack made on our unprotected flank may throw 
 us on the obstacles which protected us, crowd us back upon it, 
 and destroy us. A position which has not sufficient depth should 
 not be held for it is necessary for cavalry to have not only ground 
 enough to move over, but also to preserve the whole of its force 
 of impulsion when it attacks. The most objectionable position 
 Is one which presents a defile in our rear, and the nearer the 
 defile the more dangerous the position. So, when you are com- 
 pelled to pass a defile in advance, mass your troops in front of 
 it, bring up your supports so as to have a force strongly supported 
 at the exit from the defile, and move well to the front, so that 
 the troops following you may pass rapidly without obstruction, 
 and prevent the enemy driving you back on the defile crowding 
 you into it, and destroying you. 
 
 Q. What do you do on an open terrain? 
 
 A. March and manoeuvre so as to deploy and form line rapidly 
 in every direction. It is very rare that a plain is so fiat and 
 smooth that it has no ground that can be used to advantage 
 against an enemy. A ditch, a fence, wet meadows, fields (whose 
 deep furrows may overthrow horses crossing them perpendicularly, 
 some slight undulations, are appreciated when one comes to 
 crossing sabres; take full advantage of them to support your troops 
 and work destruction to the enemy. 
 
 Q. Where is the light cavalry generally posted? 
 
 A. Upon the wings, affer the lines have been formed. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because it scouts and protects them during the battle; 
 because it disquiets the enemy, and in a change of front, its 
 mobility gives greater rapidity to the movement of the wings. 
 
 0. Its place once assigned, should it hold it without stirring? 
 
 A. No; its commander has two things to observe; the first 
 is his relative position in the general movement; the second, 
 his own special position. Thus provided he obeys strictly the 
 orders which concern his position in reference to the whole action 
 when not ordered to keep out of sight, he may execute some 
 partial but short movements, to distract the attention of his 
 men from the losses produced by the enemy’s fire; or, when they 
 are needlessly exposed, to protect them by making use of the 
 undulations of the ground as a protecting rampart; or to mask 
 his strength; or to concentrate his squadrons, if he forsees a 
 
 73 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 threatened attack on the enemy; and the need of a new disposition 
 for deployment. 
 
 Q. If disturbed by the enemy’s fire, what should he do? 
 
 A. Select ground affording protection, and move a little to 
 the front, fiank or rear. 
 
 0- If concealed by the curtain which he has chosen, the enemy, 
 who has guessed his position still fires so as to reach him? 
 
 A. He concentrates on one of his flanks. The best method 
 of executing the movement of which I speak, either to the front 
 or rear, is to move perpendicularly in line to the point chosen, 
 and. when it is reached, move by platoons a hundred paces to the 
 right or left and then reform line. The batteries, which wiil 
 think you have reformed in your former direction, will not change 
 their aim, and throw their shots, which will pass to your right 
 or left. To better deceive the enemy, your skimishers should be 
 left in place. 
 
 Q. Should a command be kept mounted during the whole 
 time of battle? 
 
 A. No; as I have already remarked several times, one of our 
 first duties is to spare the strength of our horses and not use 
 it all up at once. Waste of their strength implies ignorance, or 
 worse than that, on the part of a commander. The same re- 
 marks apply to camp guards, to the composition of a reconnais- 
 sance, etc; he is an incompetent officer who puts more men 
 than necessary on duty; and on the field of battle it is only an 
 ignoramus that leaves his men mounted without necessity, or 
 needlessly exposes them to danger. When you have secured a 
 position where you can see all around you, so that you cannot be 
 taken by surprise where the enemy’s cannon balls cannot reach 
 you, dismount your men; but allow no one to leave his horse. 
 Remember, also, that whenever a trooper dismounts he must 
 tighten his girth 
 
 Q. If a squadron moves forward for any cause whatever, and 
 is concealed by the ground, but still suffers from artillery fire, 
 what should be done? 
 
 A. Open out the files, and even take distance between the 
 platoons. 
 
 Q. May the troops not be placed in single rank? 
 
 A. That is sometimes done in war. but principally for the 
 purpose of deceiving the enemy as to our real strength; it should 
 be executed so that the enemy wiil not discover that there is 
 no second rank. 
 
 Q. What is the best formation in which to appear upon the 
 battlefield ? 
 
 A. In close column, which has six advantages, which, properly 
 combined, constitute the complete mechanism of the art of ma- 
 noeuvring. 1st. Of being able to manoeuvre easily and rapidly in 
 every direction. 2nd. Of masking the strength of the command. 
 3d. Of keeping the whole force in hand, to be employed according 
 to circumstances and the nature of the ground. 4th. Of deploying 
 only the necessary number of men and keeping the reserve in- 
 tact. 5th. Of demoralizing the enemy, if our numbers are superior, 
 by a single deployment made at the proper time. 6th. Of using 
 the simplest and quickest movement, the most generally useful 
 deployment — that in echelon. 
 
 Q. How may the enemy compel you to show your strength? 
 
 A. By cannonading you; because in a deep formation you have 
 too much to lose to delay deploying at once. 
 
 Q. But should you have an object in masking of your forces? 
 
 A. You can then deploy in two lines, moving the second well 
 
 74 
 
COMMANDS TO BE USED IN WAR 
 
 to the rear, so that the shots fired at the first may riochet and 
 pass over the second. 
 
 Q. Having a regiment of only six squadrons under your com- 
 mand, what orders would you give in such a case? 
 
 A. On First and Fourth Squadrons, Deploy Column; the lines 
 being formed, the second would wheel by platoons to the left 
 about, move a hundred paces to the rear, and resume its front by 
 the same movement. 
 
 Q. If in close column, and you fear a combined attack on your 
 front, and one flank, what should be done? 
 
 A. I should command Column, On First Squadron, to the Rear, 
 Take Distance. At this command, all the squadrons, except the 
 first, wheel left about by platoons, move to the rear, and face 
 again to the front when each has gained a distance equal to the 
 front of a squadron. In that formation the column may be faced 
 in every dilection, each squadron being kept entire. 
 
 Q. If after the deployment of a close column in echelon, right 
 in front, as the regulations prescribe, your left flank is threatened, 
 what do you command? 
 
 A. Squadrons, On First Squadron, To the Rear, Take Distance. 
 Th s movement is executed like the preceding; if the enemy ad- 
 vances upon you, you command Squadrons, Left Wheel, Halt, in 
 order to face him in echelon; or, when the movement is nearly 
 completed. Forward, In Line. 
 
 Q. But these movements aie not in the drill regulations? 
 
 A. No; but they are useful because they are simple, and meet 
 tfe principal demand of light cavalry in war — that of enabling 
 it to face promptly in every direction. Sometimes, in unexpected 
 emergencies in war, the order of the squadrons in a regiment may 
 become inverted. For example, the first squadron, after having 
 been separated may find itself crowded into the place of the 
 third; if so, let it take that number at once. The squadron of 
 manoeuvre is no more the administrative squadron than the bat- 
 tery firing upon the enemy is the administration battery; abandon 
 then the habit of confounding the two things. 
 
 Never to manoeuvre inverted is a misfortune for light cavalry; 
 for in war circumstances may occur which will force it to do so 
 under penalty of destruction. 
 
 Q. Suppose, for example, that in executing a retreat in close 
 column, right in front, an opportunity of facing quickly to the 
 rear occurs, would you execute a slow countermarch, during which 
 the enemy might cut you in pieces? 
 
 A. No, I should wheel to the right or left about by platoons. 
 
 Q. Would you deploy from that formation? 
 
 A. Certainly, if circumstances demand it. 
 
 Q. But you would be in inverted order? 
 
 A. What matter the means? Shall the army perish in order 
 to observe a principle? In acting thus would not the emergency 
 be met better than in any other way? Would I not be able, in a 
 second, to face the enemy? Should I not be perfectly prepared to 
 make or receive an attack? However, I should deploy in inverse 
 order, so that, by wheeling my platoons about, the regiment 
 would at once be in its regular order. 
 
 Q. And if in close column, and the platoons inverted by an 
 about wheel, you wish to break by platoons, would you command, 
 “Squadrons, By Platoons, From the Left?” 
 
 A. No; but “Squadrons, By Platoons.” The fourth platoons 
 being on the right of each squadron, I should re-form my column 
 with distance in its natural order, since the regiment was march- 
 ing left in front. Our mistake consists in our always regarding 
 the first squadron as the right, and the last one as the left; In 
 the same manner, the right platoon of a squadron as the first, 
 
 75 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 and the left as the fourth. So, when forced into inverted order, the 
 first squadron is found on the left of the line and the first platoons 
 on the left of the squadrons, we no longer know what commands to . 
 give. In war and in light cavalry we must always be ready, and sure 
 in our action; hesitation is more than dangerous; in order to avoid 
 it in cases like those cited above, fill the gap left in the regulations 
 by agreeing in advance that in manoeuvring the right and left 
 of a line or squadron, whatever may be the incomplete order of 
 their formation, shall always be the real right and left, without 
 regard to the regular numbers of squadrons and platoons; and, . 
 consequently, that a close column having made a prompt about 
 wheel by platoons to face the enemy, the last squadrons and 
 platoons become the right, and the first, the left; thus there will .. 
 be no longer any doubt as to commands and their execution. 
 
 Unfortunately, I have many times seen the case occur in war 
 where a cavalry regiment, risking itself in a plain beyond reach 
 of its supports, was briskly attacked, turned, cut off by superior 
 forces and, after a valiant and even desperate resistance, on ac- 
 count of a defence conducted according to the precepts of the 
 regulations, compelled to execute a retreat, or rather individual 
 “devil take the hindmost" flight, during which it was used up 
 before supports could arrive to assist it and help it to rally. 
 
 Q. Should a similar case occur, what should be done? 
 
 A. Follow the example of the infantry, which can face in 
 every direction and form square. 
 
 Q. How? 
 
 A. As a matter of course, a colonel, finding himself in an 
 open plain cut off from his supports by forces superior to his own 
 and having no hope of erecuting his retreat safely in echelon or 
 in line, would ploy quickly into close column; for he has no 
 
 chance except in a deep formation, where he will expose less sur- 
 face, few„r men, and have them all In hand, for making a more 
 powerful and effective opening in the enemy’s ranks. 
 
 The very foundation of the art of manoeuvring in war is such 
 a habit of judging ground, so just an appreciation of distances, 
 that it becomes, so to speak, instinctive, and that, at the first 
 glance, an officer’s estimates are so correct that he need never 
 
 recur to them, and that any movement ordered may be immediately 
 executed, without having to correct it. This coup d’oeil should 
 at the same time calculate the space the squadrons will occupy, - 
 and that upon which, when formed, they will have to act; it 
 
 is for this reason that a commander should march personally some- 
 times at the head, sometimes on the flanks of the column, al- 
 ways going to the summit of the undulations of the ground to 
 verify his estimates. When this has been done he returns to 
 
 the place of command. 
 
 One of the best methods of learning the terrain, of appreciating 
 its heights, its depressions, its obstacles, its facilities, is to fol- 
 low with the eye the undulations and variations in the line of 
 march of the enemy’s skirmishers. This line shows to the trained 
 eye more effectively than any other means t>he terrain upon which 
 you will have to operate, as it passes over gradually in all its 
 development, both as regards the whole and its details. 
 
 This knowledge is so important, and the observation which I I 
 recommend so simple, that in order to obtain it in certain cases I 
 
 it is necessary to drive in the enemy's skirmishers, so that their I 
 
 retreat will furnish the information we desire. 
 
 In a nutshell, the art of war is the assemblage and employ- • 
 
 ment of superior forces upon a decisive point. 
 
 The advantage of assuming the offensive is that it compels the ] 
 enemy to regulate his movements by ours, and thus demoralizes ; 
 him. The defensive is useful only to gain time. A position In ] 
 
 76 
 
C BARGES 
 
 iwhich there is danoer of being cut off from our supports should 
 'never be taken up. 
 
 We should never charge home without being supported, nor do 
 anything which, in case of a reverse, may prove more disastrous 
 than the hoped-for success could possibly have benefited us. 
 
 The best formation for attack is that in echelon for the lines 
 support one another successively; the flanks are protected; it is 
 impossible for the enemy to manoeuvre against our wings without 
 bur being in readiness to receive him; and in case of a oheok 
 our retreat is provided for and supported. 
 
 However numerous may be the troops acting together, there 
 must be unity of action, and consequently but one commander. 
 Each detachment is a part of the whole and must act only as a 
 imember of the same body. In cavalry, centralization of action, 
 jrcducing all its rapidity, gives it also all its power. 
 
 CHARGES 
 
 Q. On what does the success of a charge depend? 
 
 A. On seizing the right moment for making it. 
 
 Q. Is it difficult to seize this moment? 
 
 A. I repeat it, the art of doing the right thing at the right 
 ;ime constitutes the very genius of War. 
 
 Q. What are we enabled to do by acting at exactly the right 
 noment? 
 
 A. 1st. To surprise the enemy. 2nd. To attack him, generally, 
 vhen he has lost confidence, or is beginning a wrong movement, 
 id. To attack him with troops more united and horses fresher 
 :han his. 4th. To hold on with greater tenacity than he oan. 
 
 Q. What should be done by a chief iwho is ordered to charge? 
 A. An approach as near as possible to the enemy at a moder- 
 ite gait, with his squadrons well aligned, draw sabre, and then 
 harge immediately. 
 
 Q. I thought sabres were to be drawn before moving forward? 
 A. That is an error. The later you draw sabre the better. 
 r he success of a charge on the enemy is dependent, for the most 
 art, on the powerful and imposing moral effect produced. It 
 hould then be all prepared in advance, and nothing should be 
 eglected which can render this effect as surprising and complete 
 s possible. 
 
 If a line draws sabre before advancing, it indicates the coming 
 movement to the enemy too long in advance, and he recognizes 
 nd prepares to meet it, and the chance of surprising him is 
 ast, lost. 
 
 If, on the contrary, the charging regiment keeps its sabres In 
 he scabbards; if it leaves the enemy in doubt as to the importance 
 f the movement to be executed, the blades, all drawn forth at 
 nee and flashing in his eyes, will no longer permit him to re- 
 ed upon the danger which, sometimes, in spite of him, will 
 hake him and compel him to retreat. Then the moral effect 
 reduced upon the enemy thus attacked may react, for the op- 
 osite reason, upon the attackers, through the same movement. 
 
 The trooper who carries his sabre a long time in his hand loses 
 is high regard and enthusiasm for his weapon; but if this same 
 ooper seizes his weapon only at a command given vigorously by 
 is chief, and only at a moment when he is to make use of it, 
 a grasps it with greater strength, more spirit, and strikes with 
 velier force. The charging trooper is an enthusiast, inspired by 
 sentiment bordering on intoxication; do not chill this feeling, so 
 vely and responsive; in prolonging it, in producing it by fits 
 
 77 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 and starts, you will destroy it. To draw his sabre, drive his 
 spurs into his horse’s sides, and strike the enemy, should be 
 
 a single act. 
 
 Q. What is the duty of squadron and platoon commanders in 
 a charge? 
 
 A. To march well aligned upon one another and make the 
 
 troops they command keep their alignment, by calling by name 
 those who hang back, until the moment the command, Charge 
 
 is given; then they must think only of being the first to pierce 
 the enemy’s line. 
 
 Q. What is the duty of the file-closers in a charge? 
 
 A. They push before them the second rank, forcing it tc 
 keep its alignment until the command, Charge. If any coward: 
 hang back they push them on vigorously. Once entered upon thi 
 melee their duty as file-closers ceases, and they use their sabrei 
 to the best of their ability. 
 
 Q. Should the men shout in charging? 
 
 A. Yes; they should shout, Forward but only at the command 
 Charge. The word Forward should be shouted as loudly and a: 
 much together as possible. 
 
 Q. How should the trooper charge? 
 
 A. Bent forward upon his horse so as to be concealed by thi 
 horse's head and neck, expose less surface to bullets, to see les: 
 of the dangers in front, and give greater spring to his horse 
 This first position also adds much force to the moral effect whicl 
 the trooper produces (when, in striking the enemy with a shout 
 he rises suddenly to his full height on his shortened stirrups ' 
 and appears to him in this threatening manner. 
 
 Q. Must a charge be made quickly? 
 
 A. The most rapid attacks are always the most certain, am 
 the least dangerous for those who execute them. They shoulc 
 be pushed with more or less perseverance upon such or such people 
 who, more or less than others, risk their cavalry. As soon a 
 the Hungarians or Prussians begin a retreat, there is no half-wa; 
 measure; you must decide to either pursue vigorously, sword i 1 
 hand, or abandon the charge immediately and rally in force. 
 
 Q. Which are the best charges to make? 
 
 A. Those which take the enemy in flank, because they d' 
 him double injury, first by demoralizing him, and second by over 
 throwing him by the force of impulsion, which is all in you > 
 favor. It was in a charge similar to this, made with so mucll 
 courage and intelligence, that Colonel Bro, at Waterloo, recap 
 tured from Ponsonby’s brigade one of our eagles taken by th 
 English. 
 
 Q. The speed of the horses should then be kept down until 
 the charge begins? 
 
 A. Yes: but when the charge is once sounded there should b 
 but one gait— the gallop. 
 
 0. What rule should govern in charging infantry? 
 
 A. Charge rapidly and home; if the enemy is disconcerted, i! 
 the lines waver, his ranks open, enter; if he closes up, charge 
 
 bayonets, and fear prevents the reloading of their arms, tur 
 
 around the square and threaten it on all sides; deafen him wit 
 noise and cry “Prisoner”; this word is understood in ever 
 language. If it shakes him, enter; if he surrenders, no mor 
 
 sabre blows, but have the arms thrown down, divide the prisoner 
 immediately, and conduct them to the rear. If, on the contrary 
 protected by an obstacle you have not perceived he receives yo 
 
 cooly and is not shaken, but reloads his weapons, you canno 
 
 hope to break the ranks; retire then at full speed, bending lo\ 
 in the saddle, to rally out of range of his bullets, to threat* 
 
 78 
 
ff 1 1 aii* 
 
 CHARGES 
 
 him again at his first deployment. To act otherwise would dis- 
 play pure obstinacy and ignorance of war. 
 
 6 Should you have to charge on infantry in line? 
 
 A. Try to attack one of its wings; you will receive but few 
 shots; you will throw it into disorder, and you will get it cheaply, 
 if you cannot do that, and the line is a long one, pierce its 
 cen trCi 
 
 Q. Should it become necessary to charge a square? 
 
 A. Attack one of its angles. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because the enemy can bring to bear upon you only an 
 oblique fire, which is much less dangerous than a direct one. 
 
 Q. What is the momentum of a trooper charging? 
 
 A. The weight of the trooper multiplied by his velocity is 
 equivalent to a weight of about 800 pounds, which should be 
 rresistible. 
 
 Q. What is the best time to charge infantry? 
 
 A. Whenever it is moving in line, or in column with distance, 
 or whenever it has been well shaken by artillery fire. 
 
 Q. What time should be selected for charging infantry in 
 column ? 
 
 A. When the column is lengthening out and the ground you 
 have to pass over to reach it is favorable to your horses; charge 
 it then in flank, and in piercing it you will separate the two 
 extremities. 
 
 Q. If the enemy surrenders, what is to be done? 
 
 A. After having made them throw down their arms you 
 withdraw from them as quickly as possible, and form your squad- 
 rons between them and the enemy who may attempt a rescue. 
 
 Q. Should the enemy’s cavalry threaten to charge, what 
 should be done? 
 
 A. Try to take up a position in front of which there are 
 
 some obstacles, invisible to the enemy; let him rush upon you, 
 and when he reaches these obstacles, which will surprise and dis- 
 unite him, charge him in your turn, and take advantage of his 
 disappointment and physical embarrassment to overwhelm him 
 on ground unfavorable to him. 
 
 Q. If the terrain be free from obstacles? 
 
 A. Determine if the enemy is beginning his charge at too 
 
 great a distance from you, with reference to the unity and rapidity 
 of his attack; if he makes this mistake, await him without stir- 
 ring, and, when he arrives within disiance, in a breathless con- 
 
 dition charge him. That is the movement we executed at 
 Waterloo against Ponsonby’s brigade. 
 
 Q. If the enemy has not taken too much space? 
 
 A. Advance when he has completed one fourth of his charge, 
 and charge upon him. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. In order to have a force of impulsion equal to his, and a 
 uniformity one fourth greater. 
 
 Q. If attacked by heavy cavalry? 
 
 A. As soon as you discover his design, ploy quickly into one 
 or several close columns, according to the time at your disposal, 
 and then charge the centre of the advancing line; turn back as 
 soon as you have pierced it; then by deploying and making a 
 half turn, you can take in rear these great heavy troopers, whom 
 you will surround and overthrow, one by one, at very little cost to 
 yourself. There is still another way of meeting the charges 
 of heavy cavalry. Suppose you have four squadrons. As soon 
 ,B as the enemy begins to move, command, Two First Squadrons, 
 T* Platoons Right Wheel, Gallop, March; then. Head of Column 
 
 Left, then Platoons, Left Into Line Wheel, Charge. The two 
 
 79 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Last Squadrons, Platoons Left Wheel, Gallop, Forward; then 
 Head of Column, Right, Right Into Line, Wheel, Charge. 
 
 In this way the heavy cavalry, which cannot change direction 
 easily, will be enclosed in the space between the two lines on 
 their flanks and rear, and cannot, without difficulty, extricate 
 themselves from the critical position in which they are placed. 
 The attack will be still more effective if our second line, unmasked 
 by this evolution, charges the cuirassiers in front. 
 
 In these movements, as in almost all those which require 
 rapidity of execution and unusual commands, it is necessary 
 that the chief should prepare for them some little time in advance 
 and forewarn his subordinates of what he intends to do, and indicate 
 to each the part he will have to act, under such or such circum- 
 stances. 
 
 Q. Under ordinary circumstances, what is the best formation in 
 which to charge? 
 
 A. In echelons. In case of success, the first echelon shakes 
 
 the enemy, the second breaks his ranks, the others are engaged only 
 so far as may be necessary. In case of a reverse, the last echelons 
 always offer a point of support, and give confidence to the 
 troops which are being pursued. 
 
 Q. Before charging upon cavalry, what should be done? 
 
 A. Feel it as a skilful fencing-master feels his adversary 
 before making an assault; execute some simple manoeuvres by 
 the flank, such as platoons right or left wheel, while preserving 
 carefully the proper distances, so as to re-form in a compact 
 and well dressed line, at the very first command. 
 
 Theaten the enemy’s wings, and, if he begins to attempt an 
 unskilled or complicated manoeuvre, seize the opportunity, which 
 may last for only a few seconds, and charge home upon him. 
 
 A movement which I have always seen succeed is, when two 
 lines observe each other without budging, and each awaits the 
 moment for attack, to ploy one of our flank squadrons into column 
 of platoons and push it forward at a full trot, perpendicularly, 
 to within a hundred paces of the enemy, with orders to outflank 
 him, and then immediately re-form line by wheeling the platoons 
 into line, and stand fast. Rarely, indeed, would the enemy move 
 against this single squadron whose performance will puzzle and 
 disquiet him, but should he move and expose his flank, charge 
 with your remaining squadrons, and you will have a great chance '.i 
 of succeeding. 
 
 This movement is in itself the whole art of war on a small scale. 
 
 If while one portion of our troops charges the enemy another 
 threatens his line of retreat, you are sure of demoralizing him r 
 and producing a decided effect upon him, because your men act 
 with one fixed idea and the enemy's are divided and distracted 
 by several. 
 
 Q. The drill book, I believe, direots artillery to be charged 
 by cavalry as foragers? 
 
 A. The formation is a good one when the ground Is smooth I 
 and the pieces exposed; but what the drill book does not say is, 
 that even upon smooth ground it is necessary, before attempting 
 to charge a battery, to havp the ground reconnoitred by a few 
 bold and well-mounted scouts, not numerous enough nor close 
 enough together to tempt the enemy to waste projectiles on them. 
 Without taking that precaution one risk being brought up standing 
 before attaining the obiect desired, and being obliged to retreat 
 with no other result than the loss of some of his men. This 
 precaution was taken by General Colbert at Wagram, when the 
 Emperor ordered him to charge the Austrian centre; and it 
 was which, by saving his brigade from useless losses, enabled 
 him, an hour later, to take so brilliant a part in the final victory. 
 
 All terrains in war, and especially those upon which bat- 
 
 80 
 
CHARGES 
 
 teries are placed, are not smooth; the elevations necessary to 
 enable the pieces to be pointed generally indicate corresponding 
 depressions, sunken roads, ravines, undulations in front of them 
 which it is necessary to know and take advantage of, to protect 
 the advance of the troops and shelter them from projectiles from 
 the outset of the charge. When once begun, in this case more 
 than any other, is rapidity of gait a guarantee of success. 
 
 One more thing well to remember is, that, if the battery you 
 charge is well supported by infantry, the charge should be so 
 directed as to keep the guns between you and the infantry. 
 The fear of killing their artillerymen will stop the infantry fire. 
 
 The best method of capturing a battery, especially in undulating 
 ground, is to make a false attack with one half of your troops 
 and charge the guns with the other. 
 
 Q. On arriving at the battery what should be done? 
 
 A. Charge the supporting troops vigorously, cut down the 
 
 gunners, but spare the drivers and make them turn the pieces 
 about, and keep up the retreat in a bold and united manner. 
 
 Q. Should the drivers show an unwillingness to go, and hang 
 back in hopes of being rescued? 
 
 A. Threaten to run them through with your sabre. 
 
 Q. Should this threat produce no fear? 
 
 A. Throw them to the ground. Let two troopers take the bridles 
 of the two lead and the two wheel horses to lead them; other 
 troopers will beat the horses’ sides with the flat of their sabres, 
 and thus force them along. 
 
 Q. If it is impossible to save the pieces, what should be done? 
 
 A. The theorists order them to be spiked; to do that spikes 
 and hammers would have to be provided before the charge; but 
 if these have not been supplied to the troopers, they will simply 
 try to throw the pieces over into a ravine, carry off the limbers or 
 shoot the horses, break the sponge-staves, then yield the ground 
 for a while, not rallying too far away and return again in force to 
 endeavor to carry off the guns. 
 
 Q. How should a charge be made on a road? 
 
 A. If the object be only to pierce the line and deploy after- 
 wards in rear of it, form your column in mass upon as large a 
 
 front as the width of the road will permit, and charge in column. 
 
 This maneouvre may be considered as the passage of a defile 
 rather than a charge properly so called; for the charge is only 
 a secondary matter — serves only to open a passage. 
 
 Q. If the object is not to pierce the line? 
 
 A. You provide for your retreat and, as a general rule in a case 
 >f this kind, you form your squadrons in column with large distances 
 (a hundred yards, for example). The head of the column should 
 be only half as wide as the road, in order that the retreating 
 squadrons may have room to pass those in support without throwing 
 them into confusion. You order in advance that the retiring squad- 
 rons shall go successively a hundred paces in rear of the last ones, 
 io re-form; then you order the columns wholly or partially formed 
 co always rest their right on the ditch, leaving free, on their left, 
 that part of the road to be used by the retiring squadrons in com- 
 ing back. 
 
 The squadron forming the advance-guard has its two leading 
 alatoons fifty paces distant from each other; the other two remain 
 jnited. You then direct that, so long as the march is undisturbed, 
 the subdivisions will mantain the gait of the head of the column, 
 '.arefully preserving their distances from one another. As soon 
 >s the leading squadron falls back, the one which follows will 
 is soon as it has been passed by the first, charge upon the enemy to 
 irive him back and, if successful in its attempt, will take the of- 
 ensive at once, and so with the others. In this manner an enemy 
 ixhausted by his efforts may be successively attacked with renewed 
 mpulsion by fresh and unblown horses. You also direct that the 
 
 81 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 columns will rally at once, at the sound of the trumpet, in order 
 that, if threatened on your flanks, your command may be quickly .'. 
 reunited. 
 
 These orders given and well understood, you place yourself at 
 the head of the first squadron and begin your march. You launch 
 your first squadron; if it should be driven back, launch the second, i 
 and so on. Should the terrain open out and admit of your deploy- 
 ing, sound the rally and form echelons on the sides of the road, t 
 keeping on it always at least one squadron, to cover your retreat 
 in case of necessity. If the enemy attacks your flank, sound the 
 rally just the same, face to the front on the road, keeping the 
 ditch as a point of support, and then maneouvre even, if the place - 
 offers facilities, or indicates the necessity, for doing so. 
 
 Q. What should be done by a colonel of cavalry when he sees - 
 that he will soon have to make a charge? 
 
 A. If possible, have the girths tightened and let the men drink - 
 a little water. 
 
 Sonqetimes it is a good thing to brace up the nerves of your men, * 
 if they are to charge infantry or artillery, by exposing them for a 
 short time to the enemy’s cannon balls and the bullets of his sharp 
 shooters. Troops who have suffered somewhat charge with more 
 vigor than those who have not. Not only have they a revenge to 
 take, a compliment to return, but it is then easy to persuade them 
 that to charge is often less dangerous than to remain in position 
 and that a prompt and vigorous effort will relieve them from the 
 wearing strain experienced in serving as a target and suffering 
 losses of men in detail, without any corresponding glory or revenge. 
 
 A general of the greatest merit of deservedly high repute, the 
 one to whom the victory of Jena is due, has often told me that 
 when preparing for an affair he systematically teased his officers 
 and that this spurring gave them all the more dash when they threw 
 themselves upon the enemy. That being admitted, one can readily 
 see that a cavalry officer who sees the moment approaching in 
 which he will have to deliver heavy blows, should keep his subor- 
 dinates in the right mood and gradually raise their moral tone to 
 the height of the attendant circumstances, which will fail to surprise 
 them when they show their most unfavorable sides, and which they 
 will meet with all their faculties under perfect control: having the 
 coolness to judge, the dash to act. 
 
 General Rule. — A charge once begun, push it home and held 
 fast; you will succeed. In all things there is a period of growth, 
 full development, and decline; this moral as well as physical truth 
 naturally indicates your only rational course and your chances of 
 success. Every charge has its moment of dash, followed by the 
 melee, then the moment of hesitation, and last that of retreat. 
 
 Be firm during the second and third moments and the victory is 
 yours; and if you take full advantage of it this o'.cs. the enemy wifi 
 be demoralized and never obtain his revenge during the campaign. 
 
 In 1806, while traversing Upper Silesia with the 7th Hussars, 
 in which I had the honor to be a sub-lieutenant, a few leagues 
 from Ratisbon I encountered the ruins of an old Gothic castle. 
 From an artistic point of view it was very uninteresting, and I was 
 retiring when, above the gate, I saw coarsely sculptured, two stags' 
 struggling upon the trunk of a tree thrown over a torrent. Above,' 
 it was written in old German, "The most persistent will win.'l 
 This device so impressed me that it has never been forgotten 
 Let it be yours in the hour of a charge. 
 
 The steadiness of a charge is prolonged, and its vigor doubled 
 by the confidence inspired by the proximity of supporting troops 
 These should maintain the gait of those making the charge, nc 
 matter how rapid it may be; follow as rapidly as they move 
 halting only when they halt, and then post themselves near b> 
 and in a threatening position. 
 
 82 
 
SKIRMISHERS AND FLANKERS 
 
 i Almost all the failures of charges are due to the slowness or 
 ignorance of the supports. A charge badly supported, no matter 
 how bravely it may have begun, becomes only a bloody affray; 
 while one well supported is always victorious and decisive. 
 Remember, then, that, in shortening the retreat of a charging 
 Force, by having the supports close at hand the possibility of a 
 Failure is prevented. 
 
 By supports I do not mean the first line only which follows 
 and supports the charge, but also the lines echelonned in rear, which 
 some forward rapidly and within short distances, to seize upon 
 oositions as fast as they are gained. 
 
 If a charge is made only to reconnoitre the enemy and force 
 him to deploy, a reserve is not necessary; but when the attack is 
 ilike an arrow, whose head must enter and fix itself, the supporting 
 troops should drive it home. 
 
 If, in a charge, the commanding officer does not permit his 
 troops to calculate, in advance, their retreat and the obstacles 
 in the way of it, it is because he has already done it for them. 
 Therefore he must, as far as possible, guard against developing 
 his front in advance of a defile, marsh, ditches, etc. 
 
 # * 
 
 SKIRMISHERS AND FLANKERS 
 
 Q. What do you understand by skirmishers and flankers? 
 
 A. The advance-guard of troops moving to the attack or in 
 •etreat; those who first come in contact with the enemy, throw 
 down the gauntlet to him, threaten him, prevent ail repose, 
 seek to discover his designs, to learn his strength, to weaken* 
 she force and results of his serious attacks; those who support 
 -he retreat; and, finally, those who surround, like the pawns of 
 i chess board, our first line with a vigilant and protecting curtain. 
 
 Q. When do you send your skirmishers forward? 
 
 A. Whenever I encounter the enemy or believe him to be near 
 Ine. 
 
 \ 0- Should they open fire upon him as soon as they see him 
 !;vithin good range? 
 
 i A. They must never fire except by order of their chief. 
 
 ' Q. And when their ammunition is becominq exhausted? 
 
 A. They must send back to the regiment for a fresh supply; 
 or firing once ordered must never be Interrupted. 
 
 Q- What stops the firing? 
 
 A. An order from the chief; and under no pretext whatever 
 hould a carbine or pistol shot be fired after that. 
 
 Q. What precautions should a skirmisher observe? 
 
 A. To aim carefully and fire only at suitable ranges. 
 
 Q. What should be the position of a skirmisher on horseback? 
 
 A. The horse being well girthed, the trooper will wear his 
 leaddress well secured by the chin strap; the cloak rolled and 
 rossed over his chest; the stirrups short, to enable him to rise 
 ,n them and thus gain greater range for his shots and not be 
 onstrained by his horse’s head in directing them; the spurs near 
 he horse’s sides, so as to turn him quickly; the knees close; 
 he upper sling of the sabre belt very short, so that the hand can 
 ;uickly seize the gripe of the sabre; the holsters uncovered; the 
 ront of the schabraque turned back on the thighs; the carbine 
 1 the hand. 
 
 Q. I thought the sabre was to be held dangling by the knot? 
 
 A. A theoretical error to be carefully avoided, if one does not 
 rlsh to embarrass his movements and cut his knee or puncture 
 is foot. 
 
 Q. And when the skirmisher Is threatened with a charge? 
 
 83 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 A. He must drop his carbine, shorten his reins, draw hi| 
 pistol from the holster, put it into the bridle-hand — where i 
 is held horizontally between the thumb and first finger, th 
 stock to the right — draw sabre, and await or anticipate the charge 
 
 Q. And if the enemy charges? 
 
 A. To receive him with the sabre. If an opportunity o 
 using the pistol occurs, fire it, dropping the sabre, for the moment 
 on the sabre knot; then throw the discharged pistol to the left 
 as I have indicated in the chapter on Arms, and quickly seiz 
 the sabre gripe. The charge finished, return the sabre to it 
 scabbard, reload the pistol, replace it in the holster, and recom 
 mence skirmishing with the carbine, taking care to fire at officer 
 in preference to soldiers. 
 
 Q. What precautions must the skirmisher observe? 
 
 A. They have all been pointed out in the chapter on Arms 
 When the trooper is unable to dismount for a long time, he mus 
 test his saddle to see if it is secure, and, in case the girth become 
 slackened, to execute his wheels to the rear so as to prevent it! 
 turning under him. 
 
 Q. Should a skirmisher always retreat by turning to the lef 
 about? ... 
 
 A. Theory, in thus instructing you, has intended to indicat 
 the necessity of always keeping the sabre hand toward the enemy 
 To carry the inference farther would be a dangerous error. Ii 
 fact, in citing a case often presenting itself, that where a sktr* 
 misher is charged and passed on his right, would he then tun 
 to the left about, so as to permit his enemy to attack him or 
 the side he thus presents to him? No; he should turn quickly 
 to the right, follow his enemy to get alongside of him, am 
 endeavor to attack him on his (the enemy’s) left. 
 
 Q. And if he overtakes him? 
 
 A. Give him a thrust in the left flank. If his enemy does no 
 fall or surrender, give him a second one. If, by the two rapic 
 movement of his horse, he should pass the enemy, he shouU 
 give him a back-handed cut across the face. If the enemy sur 
 renders, make him throw away his arms, take his horse by thi 
 bridle, and lead him swiftly to the rear. In every attack th« 
 success of the trooper will depend upon the correctness 01 
 his eye and the coolness of his judgment. 
 
 General Rule. — Whenever we follow an enemy we should pres- 
 him closely, taking him on his left, because he, being defenceless 
 is at our mercy if our horse goes better than his. In fact 
 we can use against him that which he cannot use agains 
 us — the combined length of our arms and weapons. Should he 
 on seeing his desperate situation, try to turn quickly to the right 
 catch him in the movement, drive your horse's chest against hi) 
 horse's flank, and you will overthrow him without difficulty. 
 
 Q. Should the skirmisher’s carbine become unslung and fall 
 what should he do? 
 
 A. If the enemy is near he must at once make use of hi) 
 pistol, and pick up his carbine after the enemy has withdrawn 
 
 Q. The skirmisher once in place on the line, should he half 
 
 A. He should make slight movements, especially by the flank 
 when loading his arms or close to the enemy. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because he will prevent any one from aiming at him as ac 
 curately as if he remained motionless. 
 
 Q. Should a trooper dismounted in a charge regard himsel 
 as captured? 
 
 A. No; not if he preserves his composure and is determiner 
 not to be taken. 
 
 Q. What should he do then? 
 
 A. That entirely depends upon the state of the charge ant 
 his own situation. In certain cases, as soon as he is dismountet 
 
 84 
 
SKIRMISHERS AND FLANKERS 
 
 he should endeavor to remount. If he cannot do so he should 
 lean his back against his horse and defend himself, or boldly seize 
 by the tail the horse of a comrade, who will then slacken his 
 gait, and thus bring him back to the lines, while his comrades 
 
 1 will boldly cover his retreat. If that is not possible, he must 
 
 lie on the ground, especially if the enemy is not armed with 
 ; lances, and counterfeit death. He need not fear being trampled 
 by the horses; they will all leap over him without touching him. 
 „ The charge having passed, if he finds himself on ground 
 ; occupied by the enemy, but in sight of us, he will determine 
 
 . at a glance the nature of the surrounding ground, our proximity, 
 our strength, finally, wihether he has a chance of escaping by 
 gaining, within sight of us, a ditch, ravine or wood. Then, 
 if this inspection is favorable, he will make a dash for the side 
 , of the ravine, ditch, or the wood, throwing away his sabre scabbard, 
 
 ' and keeping the blade in his hand. If the enemy’s troopers 
 
 come upon him, he will avoid them by turning, lying down, 
 
 ; striking their horses’ heads, thrusting at a trooper whose horse’s 
 bridle he holds with his left hand, and, if he overthrows him, 
 j he will leap upon his horse. In that way he will give us time 
 : to come to his assistance. 
 
 * If these chances do not present themselves and further defence 
 , is of no use, he will surrender. But as soon as night comes he 
 will endeavor to make his escape, especially if in a friendly 
 
 country, or if his captors belong to a retreating army. 
 
 ' In the campaign of 1809 we had just charged the Austrian 
 J Uhlans of Prince Charles. A non-commissioned officer of the 
 : 20th Hussars had been captured by them and was being taken 
 
 to the rear by a Uhlan, who was also leading two horses. This 
 
 1 non-commissioned officer, thinking of means of escaping, saw to his 
 Jelight, a pistol lost by some one, lying on the battlefield. It 
 -yvas loaded, he knew, for it was at full cock; to pick it up, kill 
 the Uhlan, and return to us with the two horses, was the work 
 ■ if an instant for this brave non-commissioned officer. 
 
 The day after the battle of Wagram, a young Lorain sub-lieutenant 
 >f the 20th Chasseurs, captured an Austrian officer, whom he 
 
 vas leading to the rear with all the consideration due to mis- 
 ortune and after having received the word of the captive that he 
 vould not try to escape. The troopers of the officer charged upon 
 .orain, who was compelled to make a prompt retreat; but his 
 lorse stumbled, .fell and rose again almost immediately. Lorain 
 inhorsed, but, recovering himself, leaned back against his horse 
 o defend himself, when the Austrian officer, in violation of his 
 ledge, seized him from behind to disarm him. The young French- 
 man broke his jaw with a pistol ball; then running aroutid his 
 orse and making use of him as a breast work, he gained time 
 or us to come to his rescue and bring in his prisoner. 
 
 Many prisoners are made because men lose their coolness 
 nd courage and no longer appreciate the means of escape lying 
 ■ ithin their reach. 
 
 Whenever a trooper is dismounted his comrades should go as 
 uickly as possible to cover his retreat. Some should attack the 
 nemy; others take the arms, equipment, and saddlery of the 
 ismounted man; the others help him off the field. 
 
 Q. What should a line of skirmishers do when they move 
 'rward ? 
 
 A. Preserve the line so that no large gaps can occur in it 
 trough which the enemy might rush; leave no trooper of the line 
 ^supported; not lengthen the line unnecessarily and cover too 
 uch space for no good purpose, as that would diminish its 
 rength and endanger its flanks. 
 
 Keep the line as nearly parallel as possible to that of the enemy, 
 d follow his, so to speak, with mathematical exactness, regulating 
 s movements by his. 
 
 ■ni * 
 
 it n 
 
 85 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Observe carefully and successively the ground which the enemy 
 occupies or abandons, in order not to be embarrassed on arriving or 
 the same ground. 
 
 Judge in advance of the nature of the ground as a whol< 
 and in detail by the undulations or breaking of the enemy's 
 line of skirmishers in retreating. 
 
 Remember accurately the ground passed over at each instant 
 This close observation is all the more necessary if one has t( 
 cross shallow streams, ravines, defiles, etc., in order to avoid, ir 
 oase of a hasty retreat, being embarrassed, or being thrown int< 
 a cul-de-sac, from which escape would be impossible and whicf 
 would lead to certain capture. 
 
 Gain, as far as possible, the highest points of the ground, so a: 
 to see a greater distance, and better discover the enemy's dis 
 positions. 
 
 Give prompt warning as soon as any one discovers a body o 
 the enemy, whose presence was unsuspected, forming an ambus 
 cade, preparing for or executing any movement whatever, eithe' 
 offensive or defensive. 
 
 If a skirmisher can see without being seen, he will halt a' 
 once and continue to observe without showing himself, will maki 
 signals, but will not stir until the arrival of an officer, who wil 
 come to reconnoitre in person and give him further orders. 
 
 Should some of the skirmishers see that the enemy is waverinf 
 and that his retreat can be decided by a vigorous charge, the; 
 will signal the line and, at the same time, advance rapidly upor 
 the enemy in order to produce confusion in his ranks, and takt 
 advantage of the opportunity to capture some of his men. 
 
 If the artillery is in an exposed position, they will attacl 
 that in preference to any thing else. 
 
 Q. In case of a retrograde movement, should the skirmisher: 
 retire as prescribed in the drill book? 
 
 A. When the drill book ordered the retreat to be execute: 
 successively by rank, it was desired to execute, on the drill ground 
 a manoeuvre which would teach the troopers that they shout: 
 mutually support one another in a retreat, and not strip the whob 
 line at once. This movement should then be considered in th< 
 light of the Idea which gave rise to It; but in war this ide. 
 should not prevail In the execution of a movement which wouli 
 be both impracticable and dangerous. 
 
 When a line of skirmishers is withdrawn the movement shoulc 
 not be begun or maintained according to the odd or even number 
 of the men, but the weakest horses should go first so as to leav 
 the best-mounted skirmishers as a rear guard. The line shout 
 be divided into two egual parts as far as possible, and throughou 
 its whole extent. 
 
 Q. Should one of our skirmishers be cut off by the enemy 
 what should he do? 
 
 A. If well mounted and he sees too much danger in attemptini 
 to rejoin by a direct route, after having abandoned his carbine 
 placed his sabre horizontally in his bridle hand, the hilt to th 
 right, the blade held between the thumb and forefinger, havim 
 taken his pistol in the right hand, he will move out, and, hus 
 banding the strength of his horse, pointing the pistol toward thos 
 following him, he will soon be able to rejoin his own troop b 
 making a detour: for the enemy will not pursue him to any grea 
 distance, especially in a broken country. 
 
 The movement of skirmishers, unless contrary orders are giver l 
 Is always regulated by that of the troops which they cover i 
 They must always as far as possible, keep the same distanci 
 from these troops, whether moving to the front or rear. However 
 when covering a retreat, they must hold all the defiles and tak 
 care to pass them in such a manner as to prevent the enemr 
 capturing any of their troops. They must, therefore, watch th i 
 
 86 
 
SKIRMISHERS AND FLANKERS 
 
 movements of our troops as well as those of the enemy. This 
 double duty is indispensible to the proper performances of their 
 work and the safety of their own movements. 
 
 They will gradually close in as they approach the defile; then, 
 to avoid confusion, they will cause part of their number to pass 
 through and immediately occupy the other extremity, and, facing 
 about, execute a well directed fire upon the enemy in order to 
 protect the retreat of their comrades still engaged in the defile; 
 If the troops they cover continue their march, they will overtake 
 them by doubling the gait. 
 
 , The more rapid the retreat the less the line of skirmishers 
 must be extended. It is necessary, even, to preserve better 
 order and, consequently, greater facility of movement, when the 
 shortened line of defence no longer compels the employment of 
 ’a long line of skirmishers, to assemble in platoons those not 
 (needed, and add them to the supporting troops. 
 
 If a road is thus gained only a few skirmishers should be 
 left back to form a rear guard; for otherwise it might happen that 
 fthe great number would be a disadvantage, and would cause the 
 wounding of one another in using their firearms. 
 
 The skirmishers should be directed to fire upon groups instead 
 of individuals, as, in that way, a ball which misses its target 
 may yet hit some one. For similar reasons, skirmishers should 
 preserve their intervals, as they will, in that way, afford poorer 
 targets for the enemy to fire at. 
 
 When the order is given to retire, no one must be allowed to 
 disobey it, even though an attack were certain to succeed. 
 Sometimes troopers, through an excess of courage or obstinacy, 
 (continue the combat; they should be severely punished, and, if guilty 
 of a repetition of the fault, they should be abandoned to their fate 
 because, often in order to support or protect them, an entire army 
 becomes re-engaged in a battle which may keep it employed and 
 harassed uselessly for a whole day. For one imprudent man ten 
 thousand are compromised. 
 
 Q. How should a skirmisher charge? 
 
 A. I have indicated that In the chapter on Charges. 
 
 Q. What should our troopers do when skirmishing with Infan- 
 try? 
 
 A. Try to draw them into an open place, then charge home 
 upon them and cut them in pieces. 
 
 The Cossacks often assemble to charge, but they disperse 
 in retreating. Our skirmishers generally do the opposite, what- 
 ever may be the advantages of the ground. The Cossacks are 
 ght; we are wrong. In fact, we have often seen our troopers, 
 n retiring, crowd upon one another so as to prevent any one 
 sing his weapons, obstructing one another and stopping all 
 rogress; also delaying the march of poorly mounted men and 
 feeping these unfortunates at the tail of the column, to be sabred 
 md captured while serving as shields to their guilty companions. 
 
 A confused mass of retreating men is always sabred, for two 
 'ery simple reasons; the first is, that the troopers engaged in it, 
 >y crowding too closely together, prevent all measures of individual 
 defence, and make it impossible to halt and turn about; the second 
 s, that the attacking trooper, who looks straight to the front 
 
 B ind has no fear for his flanks, rushes on with all his impelling 
 orce, with the greatest boldness upon this helpless mass, which 
 
 I ie sabres without danger to himself, and drives as far as he wishes. 
 It is not thus with a retreat conducted individually. Each 
 nan preserves all his defensive force. He is equal in every respect 
 ,;o the attacker, who carefully avoids rushing recklessly upon him, 
 decause his attention is divided, his flanks are threatened, and the 
 
 I langer is as great for him as for his antagonist. A retreat of 
 bat kind is never pushed boldly or followed very far. The slow 
 lorses can execute it as well as the fleetest; it disquiets the at- 
 
 87 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 
 tacker, checks him at the important point, and, by sudden face to 
 the rear, allows the offensive to be taken. 
 
 From time immemorial, nations with the true cavalry spirit 
 have acted in a similar manner. Polybius, in describing the 
 passage of the Trebia, tells us: "Nevertheless, Sempronius sounded 
 the retreat in order to recall his cavalry, which did not know how 
 to manoeuvre against the cavalry in their front. In fact they 
 were fighting the Numidians, whose custom it was to retreat 
 in dispersed order and return vigorously to the charge when 
 the enemy least expected them to do so.' 
 
 Q. Should orders always be conveyed to skirmishers by the 
 trumpet as prescribed in the regulations? 
 
 A. Do nothing of the kind, unless, as rarely happens in 
 war, you are upon perfectly smooth ground, executing a general i 
 movement, or unless you wish your enemy to know your plans 
 as well as you do. 
 
 Skirmishers are essentially irregular in their march, and their 
 movements entirely subordinated to those of the armies en- 
 gaged, and, above all, to the configuration of the ground. The 
 signals, numerous as they are, would not nearly suffice were you to 
 depend entirely upon them. 
 
 For example, what signals would you use should you wish to 
 refuse the right w.ng, advance the left wing, make a change of 
 front, hold back the centre, etc., or any one of fifty other move- 
 ments the necessity for which may occur at any moment? 
 
 Suppcse that our left wing has gained too much ground to the 
 front; if the retreat were sounded, the whole line would obey, and . 
 you would rectify nothing by the movement of the whole, but 
 might commit a serious fault. 
 
 General Rule. — Use the trumpet only in the few cases where 
 you wish the whole line to attack or retreat toge her. Whenever 
 you have any special orders to give (which will frequently be 
 the case), send them by a non-commissioned officer or deliver them i 
 yourself. Let those orders be short and plain. 
 
 Example. — Tell Sergeant Gueridon to halt his men until the 
 right of Sergeant Mozet's squad arrives at the angle of the 
 small wood. 
 
 Tell Sergeant Cannois to withdraw to the small stream, cross 
 it, and remain there until further orders. 
 
 Tell Sergeant Cnabrier to assemble his men and hold the small t 
 bridge. 
 
 Tell the left wing not to move forward until I am seen cross- 
 ing the highway. 
 
 Say that, If I sound the retreat, Leysac will recross the 
 
 ravine near the rye-field, Piat near the mill, Cortie near the 
 
 three poplars, and stand fast in rear of it. 
 
 Say to Lieutenant Carden that, as soon as he sees the re- 
 treat executed, he iwill assemble his skirmishers, without sound of 
 trumpet, and move at a fast trot to the farm, where he will I 
 take position, etc. 
 
 A commander of skirmishers should be very careful about the 
 
 signals he orders to be sounded; otherwise he may not only make 
 
 his own men execute wrong movements, but also lead other i 
 skirmishers, not under his orders, into error. 
 
 A skirmisher should know his enemy, and detect his ruses. If 
 he shows but few men, and those far apart, it is probable that 
 they have concealed supports. 
 
 If he extends one of his wings unusually far, he doubtless in- 
 tends to make a real or false attack. If, in retreating, he closes 
 intervals, he is about to pass a defile or attempt a charge. If, 
 without reason, he refuses one of his wings, he wishes to draw 
 the troopers in front of that wing into a trap. If he refuses his 
 center, it is for the purpose of enveloping you. If his skirmishers 
 
 88 
 
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES 
 
 lisappear suddenly, take care; stop short, and try to learn, as 
 oon as possible, the cause for this sudden disappearance; it is 
 lossible that it precedes, by only a few moments, a serious at- 
 tack upon your centre or one of your wings. 
 
 There are some ruses employed by skimishers which I have 
 ften seen successful. 
 
 At the beginning of our Polish campaign our dragoons were 
 worsted in an encounter with the Cossacks a result due to the 
 alse theories of a celebrated general. The Cossacks, emboldened 
 y their success, attacked these troopers with confidence and 
 ury. Our cuirassiers wore white cloaks like those of the 
 Iragoons; they were made to put them on, and were then moved 
 orwarded into the first line. The Cossacks, thinking they were 
 ealing again with our dragoons, charged them impetuously but 
 oon had good cause to repent of their act. The dragoons, ration- 
 lly reorganized, faithful to their former brilliant reputation, 
 nade our arms famous in Spain and in the following campaigns, 
 ook, in every affair, the most terrible and glorious revenge. 
 
 I have seen cur hussars, when fired upon by the enemy, counter- 
 ed death, or act as though wounded. The enemy, seeing them 
 all forward upon the saddle, ran to capture them, but the hus- 
 ars, rising in their saddles and firing point-blank, carried off 
 heir assailants and their horses. 
 
 It is not a matter of indifference for an officer commanding 
 kirmishers to know with whom he has to deal. In all armies, 
 
 1 spile of the successive renewal of the personnel, there exist 
 i ome regiments whose old well established reputations have never 
 egenerated. Of these are in Russia, Austria, and Prussia, the 
 tossacks of the Guard, those of the Don, Blanckenstein Hussars, 
 he Dragoons of La Tour, Merfeld Uhlans, some regiments of 
 'russian dragoons, black hussars, etc., who perform more ski II- 
 iilly than others the duty of advance guard. Upon the names 
 nder which they became famous in our wars have been grafted 
 thers since the peace, and many of them bear the names of 
 ft heir colonels; but the stock is the same, and war has not 
 nbaptized them for us. Our old soldiers, on seeing the red vests, 
 ne blue trousers with red bands, red shakos, sky-blue pelisses, 
 reen and amaranth coats, yellow schapskas, black and sky-blue 
 olmans, will at once recognize the regiments wearing them, and 
 ill manoeuvre accordingly. 
 
 ft n 
 
 SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES 
 
 To surprise an enemy requires a combination of skill and dash. 
 The effect of a surprise is demoralization. 
 
 Outpost warfare is a succession of surprises. 
 
 J An officer who, with inferior forces, frequently surprises his 
 lemy, is sure of speedily ruining him. 
 
 Although the iword surprise comprehends almost every offensive 
 reration pertaining to outpost duty, we shall include under this 
 tie only that which it is generally agreed to designate by that 
 ime. 
 
 es. I 
 lefti 
 
 ESS » 
 till 
 IE 1 
 o Jw 
 1*5 S 
 - Vr 
 
 0. 
 
 A. 
 
 o. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q- 
 
 A. 
 
 0. 
 
 A. 
 
 Q. 
 
 What is a surprise? 
 
 An unexpected attack. 
 
 What should it be? 
 
 It cannot be too sudden or too determined. 
 What precedes it? 
 
 A rapid march or an ambush. 
 
 What is an ambush? 
 
 Troops placed in a concealed position. 
 What is the best kind of an ambush? 
 
 89 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 A. One which the enemy is least likely to suspect or discover 
 
 Q. Should it always be arranged upon the route taken by tin 
 enemy? 
 
 A. The less time required for pouncing upon the enemy, thi 
 better, but there are cases in which it would have to be preparer 
 at some distance from his route. 
 
 Q. Name them. 
 
 A. Those, for instance, where it is desired to attack thi 
 
 rear or centre of an enemy’s convoy passing through a defile 
 It is probable that, before traversing this dangerous place, thi 
 
 enemy would scout its approaches; but when he has been marchin; 
 for a long time it is unlikely that his exploration will extend to . 
 very great distance. in such a case the ambush should be lai< 
 well beyond the ground covered by his scouts. 
 
 Q. There are, then, two kinds of ambushes! 
 
 A. Yes, which might be respectively called instantaneous an 
 
 prepared. 
 
 Q. Give an axample of the first kind. 
 
 A. In the early part of 1814 we were retreating, under th 
 
 command of General Maison, from Breda upon Antwerp. Th' 
 steeples of the city were already in sight. The enemy’s advance 
 guard was pressing our rear-guard so closely that the infantry 
 cavalry, and artillery of the two armies were mingled togethe 
 and fighting hand to hand. 
 
 Two of our guns were about to be captured. Reckinger, ai 
 officer of our lancer regiment, found himself with only a dozei 
 men, marching with the extreme rear-guard; instantly making u 
 his mind, he disappeared at a garden. Our infantry, mixed ui 
 with a furious enemy, continued its retreat, but, overpowerei 
 by numbers, lost its two guns. The enemy cried Victory! gatherer 
 around the horses and guns, and turned them upon us; the intrepii 
 Reckinger then sallied out from his ambush, and, in three mir 
 utes afterwards, the guns, and the Prussians in charge of them 
 were ours. 
 
 Q. What are prepared ambuscades? 
 
 A. Those planned in advance, which form part of a movemen 
 that has been studied and calculated. Thus, for example, i 
 commanding an advance guard strong enough to act on th 
 offensive, and knowing well the ground upon which I am goini 
 
 to drive back the enemy, I know that portions of his flank ma 
 
 be attacked at such or such a point, I send forward the troop 
 detailed to make these attacks, and direot them to conceal them 
 selves at certain places; signals being agreed upon in advance 
 and the hour for making the attack being designated, I combing 
 my offensive movement with theirs. 
 
 If the effect produced by an ambush depends upon the sudder. j 
 
 ness and determination with which the attack is mad”, its succes ; 
 
 depends on two indispensable conditions — namely a perfect know ( 
 edge of the enemy and of the ground. In fact, to surprise a 
 enemy it is absolutely necessary to know his strength and th 
 disposition of his troops. To ambush him, it is not only necessar 
 to select a suitable place, but to reach it without being di! 
 covered or giving the least suspicion of our march. Troops goin 
 to form an ambush should, then, march compactly, silently, an 
 by the most concealed roads. 
 
 I cannot forego citing here an example of an ambush upon 4 
 large scale. In 1812 we were aproaching Smolensk, near whic 
 the enemy was intrenched. The weather was superb. The bivouac . 
 of our army were upon the heights commanding the city. Th ; 
 Emperor ordered General Morand. so justly celebrated, to carr 
 the suburbs. We saw this intrepid division descend into j 
 ravine, turn to the left around a hill, and close up and forn 
 unnoticed by the enemy, behind a mill. All at once, as thoug 
 
 90 
 
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES 
 
 by enchantment, this division was hurled upon the oity. In the 
 twinkling of an eye suburbs, artillery outworks, all were in our 
 possession. Our whole army clapped their hands. Never in my 
 life have I seen a more magnificent spectacle, nor one which 
 
 left upon my mind a more profound impression of the majesty 
 
 of war and of the power of genius and courage. 
 
 The spot to be selected for an ambush depends, more or less, 
 upon the clearness of the day or night. When concealed by 
 the shades of night or by fog, no other curtain is needed, but 
 
 the darkness or fog should be impenetrable. When that is not 
 
 the case you will have to make use of woods, walls, or a ravine 
 to conceal your movements from observation. Always calculate 
 their height or depth so as to prevent the visualray from the 
 enemy falling upon you and discovering the tops of your head- 
 dresses and arms. The least accident of that kind might be- 
 tray your presence and lead to your destruction. Remember the 
 hare which, because he had placed his head in a hole and could 
 see nothing, believed himself unseen. 
 
 Often the impatience of the troops discloses the place of an 
 ambush. Are they coming? says some one, and some curious 
 fellow advances to the edge of the wood, or raises his head above 
 the wall, or speaks in a loud tone. From that moment the fruit of 
 your labors and trouble is lost; you are discovered and perhaps ex- 
 posed to great danger. 
 
 Remember that troops in ambush are always in the air, in a 
 critical position; that they are risking everything for the sake 
 of success. A detachment of fifty men, which, well directed, 
 might have thrown into confusion a column ten times its strength 
 and made a very important and decisive diversion is, if dis- 
 covered, lost. 
 
 The place selected for an ambush should always be, so to 
 i speak, a fortification to be closed at our pleasure on the side 
 toward the enemy and open on the line of retreat. The ground 
 which separates it from the enemy should be favorable for move- 
 ments at the gallop, that to the rear well reconnoitred, and cal- 
 culated for the front of the troops in case of a check. 
 
 I am speaking here of ambuscades composed of small bodies, 
 which in spite of all precautions, may lead to more serious af- 
 fairs than were expected. As to those composed of superior 
 forces they have to look out for only one thing — that is, to see 
 that no one escapes. 
 
 After a success they have time to decide whether to advance 
 or retreat by such or such a road, all being egually well known. 
 
 To sum up, it is proper to arrange ambuscades for the pur- 
 pose of capturing reconnoitring parties, attacking columns and 
 convoys, checking an advance-guard displaying too much boldness, 
 cutting off and destroying a weak rear-guard, and surprising a 
 bivouac too confident of its security, works badly placed and 
 poorly guarded, troops faultily disposed and placed in exposed 
 situations on the field of battle. 
 
 Night is the most favorable time for arranging ambuscades, but 
 it is not the only thing that favors such an operation. The 
 weather is to be taken into consideration, and cold, snow, rain, 
 or a high wind would be of great assistance. 
 
 11 0. Why? 
 
 A. Because, in cold weather, the men whom you attack are 
 less active, not so well prepared; their cloaks are almost always 
 folded about ttiem and render their hearing less acute; the rain 
 ; wets their priming and makes their arms miss fire. A high wind 
 greatly favors a secret march, especially if it comes from the 
 direction of the enemy, because it prevents the tramping of the 
 horses being heard. In attempting a surprise profit by these 
 
 91 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 hints. If you can choose your route turn the enemy on the side 
 opposite to the wind. In attempting to surprise infantry choose 
 rainy weather. If making a night attack wait for the moment 
 when, the reconnaissances having returned, there will be less vigi- 
 lance, and the command is generally asleep. 
 
 Q. In a night surprise of a bivouac, what should be done? 
 
 A. As a matter of precaution in such an attack the commander ' 
 should wear, and make his men wear, something by which they 
 can recognize one another, such as a white handkerchief on the 
 left arm, a small branch, a shako plume, etc.; this sign should be 
 visible in the darkest night. By taking this precaution, all the 
 more useful if the enemy wears a dark uniform and of the same 
 cut as ours, our troops will avoid sabring one another. That done 
 the chief explains, not only to tbe officers, but to all the men, 
 the plan of attack, and designates two routes of retreat: one 
 by the road leading directly from the enemy to our army on which 
 his grand guards will be posted, which are to be sabred and cap- 
 tured in passing; the other, the road by which the troops have 
 marched to their present position. 
 
 In addition, he agrees upon four trumpet signals, the shortest 
 and the ones to which the men are the most accustomed. 
 
 The first will mean, Sabre, take no prisoners. 
 
 The second, Make prisoners. 
 
 The third, Retire by the direct road. 
 
 Fourth, Retire by the road you came on. 
 
 At the last two signals the signs used for recognition will 
 disappear; the troops will retreat quickly and assemble at the 
 outlet from the village. 
 
 At Atsh, near Comorn, in Hungary, we were surprised by the 
 insurgents. The sign of recognition which the Hussars had 
 adopted was the unfolded white cloak. It served to give unity to ; 
 their attack which met with great success. But when we got into 
 condition for fighting, this sign was fatal to those who showed 
 it. Their troops soon perceived this and lost no time in discard- 
 ing it. This action protected their retreat, and it was secured 
 while our troops were fighting among themselves, mistaking one 
 another for the enemy. 
 
 A night surprise may be more or less hazardous; by this I 
 mean that which is undertaken by troops not supported and in- 
 ferior in numbers to those attacked. A surprise has always one 
 special object, that of terrifying the enemy, destroying him, or both I . 
 at the same time. If the surprise is effected by a small party 
 and its special object is to terrify the enemy, it should use its 
 pistols, and its attack should be sudden. The men should shout, 
 gallop about, make no prisoners, and retreat rapidly. 
 
 If, on the contrary, the surprise is made by a large force, well i, 
 supported, and it wishes to capture the enemy, it should move 
 silently, manoeuvre, seize, in regular order the important points 
 such as the barrack or lodging of the colonel, the outlets from 
 the village, bivouac, etc., and carry off at once the horses and i 
 the grand guards. If killing is unavoidable, let it be done with i 
 sabre points. 
 
 Q. Which is the best side on which to surprise a bivouao? 
 
 A. That opposite to the grand guards. 
 
 Q. As soon as the attack has succeeded, what should be done? 
 
 A. Make the disarmed prisoners file out quickly on their I 
 
 horses, which will be led away under a good escort that will, j 
 
 under no pretext, wait for the detachment, but regain the army i 
 
 as soon as possible. 
 
 Q. If the attack fails and we have to retreat? 
 
 92 
 
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES 
 
 A. Withdraw the detachment quickly, and without halting. 
 Leave the best mounted men for a rear guard and move them on 
 a false route to throw off the right track those who may follow. 
 These troopers should keep up a steady fire to conceal the noise 
 made by the marching of the detachment, and when they think 
 that their ruse has succeeded, and that those they are covering 
 are out of danger, they will make a detour and rejoin the detach- 
 ment. 
 
 If the enemy's bivouac has been well selected and entrance to 
 It is difficult, special means for surprising it will have to be 
 adopted. The principal thing to be done is to get the enemy on 
 to ground less favorable to him than that which he occupies. To 
 do that, divide your force into two parts of unequal strength, 
 place the stronger in concealment, and send the other to skirmish 
 with the enemy’s grand guard; if this succeeds in drawing him 
 out of his bivouac he must be vigorously charged by the troops 
 forming the ambuscade. 
 
 A night attack may have a less important object as, for instance, 
 increasing the fatigue of the enemy, or preventing him from 
 sleeping. In this case but few men are needed, as the operation 
 will be limited to the carrying off of a few vedettes or small 
 posts, and discharging pistols along the line. 
 
 Q. If the enemy should undertake to surprise you, what do 
 you do? 
 
 A. It is indispensable for an officer of the advance-guard, who 
 establishes himself in a bivouac and fears that the enemy may 
 attempt to surprise him, to take certain precautions at the very 
 moment of installing himself. These, named below, are especially 
 necessary if his force is small and distant from supports. 
 
 He should select a sheltered bivouac fortified, so to speak, by 
 a ditch, fence, barricades, etc., so as not to be approached at 
 a gallop, or attacked unexpectedly. Movable barricades should 
 close all the approaches to the bivouac which are not naturally 
 defended, and should be so placed as not to be discovered or car- 
 ried away by the enemy. The bivouac should be as much con- 
 sentrated as possible. 
 
 Orders should be given that, in case of an attack, the men are 
 lot to run to their horses, but defend themselves on foot. 
 
 Assign to each man the post he is to take at the sound of 
 Ihe first shot. Put out the fires, or light them in a false position. 
 <eep a part of the horses bridled, and many of the men awake, 
 -et every trooper have his bridle on his arm, his cartridge-box on 
 lis person, and his carbine in his hand. 
 
 Q. If the bivouac is in a farm-house? 
 
 A. Close it, and, the instant the attack begins, make a few 
 if the men bridle the horses while the others fire through the 
 vindows, until the defences are about to be forced; then mount 
 he whole command and execute a combined and vigorous sortie. 
 
 Q. Should the bivouac be in an open plain and entirely 
 inprotected? 
 
 A. So arrange matters as to mount and assemble in the 
 east possible time. 
 
 Q. Should the enemy surprise a few isolated men? 
 
 A. They should keep cool, not run to their horses, but grapple 
 rith the enemy hand to hand, fire on him at point blank range, 
 oint him, hamstring his horses, stoop down, get behind obstacles, 
 uch as a ditch, a tree, a post, etc., and make no prisoners, 
 i dismounted man who preserves his coolness is not likely to 
 uffer at the hands of a trooper who attacks him at night. 
 
 Night surprises are, as a general thing, more terrifying than 
 angerous. Eight times in nine their success depends upon 
 le moral effect produced. Meet them with great steadiness 
 
 93 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 and coolness. Silence and steadiness on the part of the attacked 
 often terrify the attacker so that the tables are turned, the moral 
 effect reversed, and the attacker compelled to ingloriously retreat. 
 
 Q. Are surprises as dangerous by day as by night? 
 
 A. Yes, when they succeed, for the attacker makes sure of 
 his blows, and learns the weakness of the attacked. In surprises 
 of every kind it is necessary, above all things, to keep cool. 
 
 On the day of the affair at Maeroslawetz, in the Russian cam- 
 paign, almost the whole of the Russian cavalry was concealed 
 on the flanks of our column. It made so well combined an attack 
 upon our general headquarters that even the Emperor himself 
 was in great danger. At the same moment Platoff, with his 
 Cossacks charged upon us who formed tha rear-guard. From 
 fifteen hundred to two thousand Cossacks surrounded the two 
 feeble squadrons which remained to us. and pressed them so 
 closely that men in the ranks were wounded by the Cossack lances. 
 One of these squadrons, commanded by the brave Verdiers (today , 
 a general officer), charged lances front and rear, and so intimidated 
 the enemy by their display of coolness that he withdrew without 
 attacking. We held our position against the enemy ten times 
 our strength, whose bold manner might have had the most dis- 
 astrous results for us and, perhaps for the entire army, but for the 
 calm courage of our chiefs and our lancers. 
 
 Q. How may the enemy be drawn into an ambush? 
 
 A. By occupying his attention so as to prevent his discovering 
 it. To accomplish that, one should sometimes have his most 
 active troopers engage him, and then suddenly retreat in such a 
 manner as to cause the enemy to pursue. In this way he might be 
 drawn directly into the ambush. Again, by manoeuvring slowly,', 
 changing front, and pushing him, he might be driven into the 
 trap laid for him. 
 
 THE SUPPORT OF ARTILLERY 
 
 Q. Should cavalry, in supporting artillery, be placed in rear 
 of the battery? 
 
 A. That is a mistake, which I have seen made only too often, 
 and which, so far as I could learn, was simply due to following 
 an ancient custom, or to the vanity of certain officers who thought - 
 it a meritorious thing to seek useless dangers, or to the ignorance 
 of officers who, having been employed in this way only once or 
 twice in their lives, had no idea of the proper method of perform- 
 ing the duty assigned them. 
 
 Q. Should the cavalry be posted near the guns? 
 
 A. Another mistake. 
 
 Q. Should it not be posted where the enemy can see it and( 
 thus know that the guns are supported? 
 
 A. Another mistake, as censurable as the other two. 
 
 Q. Where should the support be placed, then? 
 
 A. Your own judgment should supply the answer to this 
 question. What is the duty of the artillery support? Is il 
 to get slaughtered without crossing a sabre, or to get so used ur 
 that It is worthless when actually needed? Is it to hampe 
 the movement of the guns? Is it to encourage the enemy to chargi < 
 the battery? That is what would Infallibly happen if you shoulc* 
 post the support as has been indicated. 
 
 The support of a battery, if placed behind it, would surely bf ■ 
 destroyed In short order by the enemy’s projectiles directed upor 
 the battery. If posted too near, it will interfere with the com 
 munication between the guns and their caissons; _ if placed ir 
 full view of the enemy, its strength will be easily estimated 
 counted even, especially if the guns are in an exposed position 
 
 94 
 
THE SUPPORT OF ARTILLERY 
 
 and then be attacked and overwhelmed by superior numbers. 
 
 The supporting troops should be placed on the flanks of the 
 battery to avoid the enemy’s shot and shell; at least a hundred 
 yards distant, so as to obtain its full power of impulsion if called 
 on to resist a charge made by the enemy; and so concealed as 
 to avoid serving as a target, and to keep the enemy in ignorance 
 of both its strength and position. 
 
 Q. But if placed under cover, how will it be able to observe 
 :he enemy’s movements? 
 
 A. The commanding officer alone should place himself where 
 Tie can observe everything, while keeping in sight of his troops. 
 He should be careful to so place himself that the enemy cannot 
 oy seeing him, judge of the position of the support. 
 
 Q. If the battery is charged, what is to be done by the support? 
 A. Let the charge come on, and, when it has spent its force 
 tnd the horses are disunited and blown, as they naturally will 
 be, charge the enemy in front or flank at full speed and make 
 svery effort to repulse him. If your charge succeeds, do not pursue 
 i:he enemy very far, but halt and immediately unmask our rescued 
 i cattery, so that it may pound the retreating enemy. 
 
 Q. If our battery, finding its position too much exposed, and 
 :he demonstrations of the enemy too threatening, begins to 
 etreat, what should the support do? 
 
 A. If the retreat is to be for a short distance only, it will 
 ireserve the same relative position to the battery that it had before. 
 
 Q. If the retreat is made in haste, and is to be extended to 
 iiome distance before the battery will take position again? 
 
 A. Tne supporting troops should march abreast of the battery 
 ind, if it breaks into column, act as rear-guard to it. 
 
 Q. If in executing its retreat, the battery should take to a 
 causeway? 
 
 A. The supporting troops unmask the rear pieces, place them- 
 elves so as to leave the road free, oppose any attacks on the 
 lanks and keep in readiness to resist attacks from the front. 
 
 Q. Should the battery be attacked by very superior forces, 
 
 hould the support retreat? 
 
 A. No, not so long as the connoneers remain at their guns. 
 Q. If the cannoneers are killed or captured and the enemy 
 ; eizes the pieces? 
 
 1 A. The supporting troops must charge his rear guard, harass 
 im, obstruct his retreat, and, finally, employ every means to 
 
 : Stake the guns or force them on to ground from which the 
 
 nemy himself cannot extricate them. 
 
 Q. If we retake the guns? 
 
 A. Bring them back. 
 
 Q. If you cannot bring them back? 
 
 A. Save the teams. 
 
 Q. If the cannoneers, finding it impossible to save the pieces, 
 ecide to spike them, or simply to unhitch the teams and retreat? 
 
 A. The supporting troops will then cover the retreat of the 
 unners and the teams. 
 
 Q. If while the battery is retreating, some of the pieces get 
 luck in the mud, or are overturned, so that the gunners alone 
 ; innot right them or move them along? 
 
 A. The most active men of the support will dismount at cnce, 
 ive their horses to other men, and assist the gunners. 
 
 ] Q. If the enemy should seize this moment for making an 
 Hack? 
 
 A. The troopers remount and face the enemy. 
 
 Q. If a battery in position loses so many men that it is 
 table to continue its fire and asks for assistance from the support? 
 A. The men will be furnished at once from the nearest platoon, 
 id the commander of the support be notified. 
 
 Q. Sometimes a ruse is employed against great masses of 
 
 95 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 - 
 
 1 
 
 cavalry united for a charge, which consists in moving forward ; 
 battery whose offensive movement is concealed by a squadroi 
 placed in front of it; what is the duty of the commander o 
 this squadron? 
 
 A. During the advance, to keep his squadron in front of thi 
 guns, so as to conceal them from the enemy; then, when th> 
 guns are in battery and loaded, the matches lighted, and every 
 thing ready for firing, to unmask the battery by a movement b 
 platoons to the right or left, at a gallop, and join the support 
 
 The support should always act so as to deserve the entire con 
 fidence of the artillerymen, who will then work their guns witl { 
 greater coolness and accuracy, and keep up their firing for 1 1, 
 longer time. 
 
 The support will have to be still more watchful when supportini 
 guns of the new model than when protecting those of the ole 
 pattern. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because, as the old guns were withdrawn by the pro 
 
 longe, they could be fought to the last moment and fire grape am 
 canister a long time without changing position, while the nev 
 ones require to be limbered up before retreating, and the artillery 
 men should not be expected to delay the execution of this ma 
 noeuvre until the enemy’s cavalry begins sabring them. For thi 
 same reasons the new pieces require more attention when re 
 treating, than the old ones do. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because, with the old-model gun, if one wheel horse i 
 
 killed and the rear traces cut, the piece may still continue it 
 
 retreat, drawn by the whiffletree, while with the new piece 
 
 the six horses pull on the same four traces, and if one of then 
 is cut or broken, the gun is unhitched. Should such an acciden 
 happen, the supports should hasten to assist in repairing the dam 
 age, and place their horses and forage ropes at the disposal o 
 
 the battery. 
 
 PARTISANS. 
 
 Q. What is a partisan? 
 
 A. A detachment is on partisan service when it operate 
 separately and apart from the army, and under the instruction 
 of its own chief which are based on orders given only in gen 
 eral terms and on information in regard to the general movement 
 of the whole army. 
 
 A partisan is sent to stir up a province: to annoy the flank 
 or rear of a hostile army; to capture or destroy depots or convoys 
 etc.; to make prisoners and throw the enemy off the scent ii 
 regard to the movement of our own troops; etc. 
 
 Q. What should be the first care of an officer ordered o 
 partisan service? 
 
 A. To see that the detachment he commands is composed o 
 bold and well-mounted men. 
 
 Q. And the second? 
 
 A. To receive from his general an accurate map of the countr 
 in which he is to operate, as correct information as possibl 
 in regard to the position of the enemy and of his probable ir ' 
 tentions, and to learn the present and future movements of ou 
 own army. 
 
 Q. Why this last information, since he is to act separately 
 
 A. So as to know where to send his reports, and where t 
 fall back upon supports in case of an emergency compelling 
 retreat. 
 
 96 
 
PARTISANS 
 
 Partisan warfare is very hazardous. It can be successfully 
 executed only by a chief who is shrewd, quick and bold, sup- 
 ported by troops like himself. For the partisan there is no repose; 
 he must always have his eyes open, and, if fatigue compels him 
 to slumber for an instant, an advance-line of spies should guard 
 him and warn him of danger. 
 
 The warfare he carries on is that of a corsair. His strength 
 lies in surprise. The vulture which, unperceived, swoops down 
 upon its prey, captures it, and disappears, is the image of the 
 partisan. Therefore the blows he delivers should be decided, 
 
 prompt, terrible even, if necessary, and no trace of his retreat 
 should be left behind. 
 
 The partisan resorts to every possible stratagem. One will 
 
 arrange his attack so well, and cast his net so accurately over 
 the hostile detachment vfhich he surprises, that not a single per- 
 son shall escape to give the alarm. Another, in a hostile 
 
 country, works with the enemy, levies contributions of horses 
 and cloth in his name, and remounts and clothes his men 
 at the expense of the King of Prussia. Another strips his pris- 
 oners, puts their uniform on his own men, and enters the enemy's 
 bivouacs, taking advantage of the deception to surprise them and 
 but them to pieces. Another, twenty leagues in rear of the 
 
 Russian army, rescues our captured men, mounts them on the 
 
 horses of the escort, and thus doubles his strength. Another 
 
 captures a park of artillery. The enemy Informed of the fact, 
 icomes up two hours later, and while he is viewing the smoking 
 remains of his exploded caissons, the partisan is striking another 
 'equally destructive blow three leagues In his rear. The enemy, 
 ignorant of the numerical strength of the bold detachment, halts, 
 takes up a position, draws In the troops which might have been 
 
 of great assistance to his army, and ours profit by these de- 
 
 lays. Another, like the brave and Illustrious Pole, Umlnski, at 
 (the head of a few squadrons, incites a province to insurrection, 
 creates a powerful diversion, and, after several victories, when 
 forced to retreat, returns to the national army with his foroes 
 ncreased threefold. 
 
 The partisan, by his isolation, by his freedom from all obliga- 
 ' lion to march immediately In such or such a direction, or to re- 
 turn to any certain place, is free from all constraint; he is master 
 of all the ground within range of his vision; he should observe 
 
 I t with unusual intelligence, and should form his opinion not so 
 nuch from his own point of view as from that of the enemy, 
 hus, he should observe the heights, the depths and the curtains in 
 •eference to this point of view, and always place himself so as to 
 nrevent, by means of these curtains, the enemy’s observation of 
 i is command. 
 
 If he descends by a certain oath, the hill on his right will 
 lonoeal the movement. If he crosses a plain in a certain di- 
 rection, the little wood visible on his left will mask his march 
 
 I or ten minutes, and that time will be sufficient for him to 
 lain the ravine in iwhich he will be able to lie in ambush. 
 
 As the partisan always acts by surprising the enemy, the of- 
 ensive positions he takes will always be ambuscades. The nearer 
 .0 the point of attack, the better they are; but this nearness 
 ihould always be calculated with reference to the greater or less 
 onfidence and watchfulness of the enemy. 
 
 The partisan, after having boldly oaptured a convoy, begins 
 lis retreat. This should be made promptly, for the enemy may 
 ie informed and send superior forces in pursuit. He should 
 ompare the importance and possibility of preserving the prize 
 
 » te has oaptured with that of the attack he may have to resist 
 nd the speed with which his retreat must be made. The rapid 
 
 97 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 comparison would determine him to destroy everything which might 
 injuriously delay him, and he retires, not on the road by which 
 he came, but by one which will shorten the distance to a place 
 of safety. The undulations of the ground, the woods, ravines, 
 all mask his retreat, and he halts only after several hours' march, i 
 knowing that the enemy’s pursuit will not extend beyond a cer- i 
 tain distanoe; that the more prolonged, the weaker and less 
 dangerous it is; especially if the retreating force leads it over 
 a difficult and broken country, favorable to the formation of am- 
 buscades. 
 
 If, however, the pursuing enemy appears at some distance 
 and threatens to attaok openly and vigorously, the partisan does 
 not hesitate to throw him off the track. He moves the convoy 
 out quietly, under the officer whom he orders to march rapidly 
 
 and, in case of attack, to abandon everything he thinks it im- i 
 
 possible to save. Then he moves to the right or left with the I 
 
 main body of his troops, and draws in that direction the pur- 
 suing enemy, wtio is thus deceived and led away from his proper 
 objective. 
 
 A partisan wearied by long exertion and in need of recupera- 
 tion should either gain one of our posts in rear of the enemy 
 
 and which is not blockaded by him, or else throw himself entirely 
 off the enemy's lines of operations. As a rule, these lines Ir 
 rear of his position are limited to a few roads guarded by detach- - 
 ments rejoining the army, and are scouted to a very short dis- 
 tance only. 
 
 The partisan need go, then, but a few leagues to reach a plact 
 of safety. Nevertheless, to render this safety more complete hi 
 frequently changes his position. 
 
 If the partisan has sick or wounded men, he takes them witf 
 him and bestows the greatest care upon them. If they cannot bi 
 transported with the command without delaying the speed of hi; 
 marches, he should leave them in a village, placing them In the 
 care of the principal people, who will be held personally respon 
 sible for their treatment. 
 
 If prisoners have been made, in order not to weaken himsel - 
 they will be sent into a friendly country, and confided to the 
 care of the rural guards, who will deliver them, by roundabou 
 ways, to our army. 
 
 If the partisan has captured guns and does not feel perfectly 
 sure of reaching our army with them, he should bury them se 
 cretly, and out of sight of his prisoners, in some unfrequenter 
 wood, and mark the place where they have been buried. After 
 wards he takes along with him the limbers and destroys them a 
 a point some leagues distant, so that the spot where the gun ) 
 have been concealed may be certain to remain unknown. 
 
 General Rule — The partisan having to be, above all things 
 as active as possible, he must keep nothing with him whicl - 
 might delay or burden his command. 
 
 LED HORSES. SUTLERS 
 
 Q. What Is understood by "led horses?” 
 
 A. The extra horses of officers, or horses of the regimen 
 without riders, which are led by men detailed for the purpose 
 Q. In war where do they march? 
 
 A. With the regiment and where they will be secure from at 
 tack by the enemy. When a regiment is acting alone, its led horse 
 follow it; if it is acting as rear guard, the led horses precede It 
 
 98 
 
LED HORSES-SUTLERS 
 
 if the regiment is likely to be attacked in front and rear, the 
 led horses are placed in the oentre of the column. 
 
 Q. If the regiment is brigaded? 
 
 A. its led horses are united with those of the other regiments, 
 and all march wherever the commanding general may direct. 
 
 Q. And during a fight? 
 
 A. The led horses are kept in rear of the line of battle, out 
 of range of the enemy’s fire, and frequently close to the field 
 hospitals. 
 
 Q. Are the led horses of a regiment placed under command of 
 any one? 
 
 A. Yes; they should be commanded by a non-commissioned 
 officer, and sometimes, when danger is feared, by an officer, even. 
 
 Q. What is the duty of the commander? 
 
 A. To assemble them properly and make them keep together. 
 When resting, to choose the most favorable and least exposed 
 place for the halt; to reconnoitre the vicinity, and never to get 
 so far separated from the regiment as to lose it or fail to join 
 it in bivouac during the evening. 
 
 Q. Should the led horses be required to join the regiment 
 every day? 
 
 A. Yes; except in case of imminent danger, or orders given 
 to the contrary. 
 
 Q. How often should the officer in charge of the led horses 
 be relieved? 
 
 A. His tour should be for only twenty-four hours, but he 
 is not to relinquish it until regularly relieved. 
 
 Sometimes, In order to retain the valuable services of a non- 
 commissioned officer in the ranks, the care of the led horses 
 is intrusted to a sick or slightly wounded one. This important 
 duty must not, however, be confided to anyone not perfectly able to 
 perform it. To command the led horses requires gentleness, intel- 
 ligence and great firmness. The intelligence is demanded In the 
 selection of the most favorable positions, as regards safety and 
 comfort, and in judging the characters of the men of the command. 
 Gentleness will remove all pretext for the dissatisfied servants 
 saving the command, marching by themselves, and even deserting 
 sometimes. Firmness will regulate the conduct of the marches 
 md halts. 
 
 If the oommander of the led horses should lose sight of the 
 'egiment on the day of a battle, he should keep himself informed 
 hrough the men returning from the battlefield, of the movements 
 t has made, and according to what he learns, move closer to 
 ir retire farther from the place it is said to occupy. 
 
 In selecting a place for the led horses he must always bear in 
 nind the necessity for having them where they may be easily 
 ound. Therefore he must never select a position which it would 
 >6 impossible, or even require much time, to find. 
 
 He must also see that the men give the horses an opportunity 
 o feed, and that they do not leave them. If foraging parties 
 
 ! re sent out, he must require at least half of the men to remain 
 rith the horses and be responsible for their safety. Sometimes 
 e should also accompany the foragers to prevent their pillaging, 
 letting drunk, or overloading the horses taken out for the purpose 
 if carrying back the forage. 
 
 After the horses have eaten, or when he fears a surprise, he 
 nust have the horses bridled, and have the men hold the reins 
 n their arms. 
 
 He must also see that the forage and provisions obtained at 
 he halt are not wasted, and that they are so managed that a 
 ortion may be taken to the bivouac of the regiment for the 
 orses which have been ridden and for their riders. He must 
 ave the horses watered on arriving at a stream or well, and 
 ave the wounds of those needing special care dressed. On return- 
 
 99 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 ing to the regiment he must make his report to the chief of his 
 corps. 
 
 Q. When a man is dismounted, where should he go with his 
 arms and equipment? 
 
 A. To the led horses, which becomes the general rendezvous 
 of men separated from their commands. 
 
 Q. And when a horse is to be sent to a sub-depot? 
 
 A. He should be sent to join the led horses, if there should 
 be found among them a sound man and a horse in good condition, 
 the two should be sent to join the regiment. In like manner, a 
 horse unfit for active service should be given to some wounded 
 man who is going to the rear. 
 
 Q. How could there be, among the led horses, a troop horse 
 in serviceable condition. 
 
 A. Because all captured horses, and those whose riders have 
 beoome disabled, are sent there for the use of dismounted men. 
 
 Q. If you should have some brave officers and non-commissioned 
 offioers or troopers who, slightly wounded, are unable to continue 
 on duty at the outposts, but who would be made strong and 
 active again by a few days’ rest. 
 
 A. Let them march with the led horses, and, as soon as they 
 are fit for duty again, recall them to the regiment. 
 
 Q. If men perfeotly fit for duty come to the led horses? 
 
 A. They must be sent back to their squadrons immediately, j 
 
 Q. Where do the sutlers march? 
 
 A. Their intelligence, their prospects of gain, enable them tc 
 easily choose the place most suitable for the sale of the thing; 
 they carry. Nevertheless, custom has established certain rule; 
 for their government, which it is necessary to know. The sutlers 
 having wagons should march with the led horses. Those who arc 
 mounted should march nearer the regiment; that is to say, al 
 some point between it and the led horses. 
 
 A sutler must sell to others only when the regiment to which h< 
 is attaohed has no need of anything. He must not leave hi; 
 proper place except for the time required to purohase supplies 
 for the regiment. 
 
 A sutler should be required to always carry with him a pack 
 age of linen and lint for use in case of need in first aid tc 
 the iwounded. Should the supply oarried by the surgeons becomi 
 exhausted, this would be found to be very acceptable. 
 
 The sutler should not be allowed to take advantage of thi 
 scarcity of supplies to sell his goods to the regiment at exorbi 
 tant prices. His profits should be large to compensate him fo 
 his labor, but must not be excessive. 
 
 A good sutler is a valuable addition to a regiment, and, there 
 fore, he should receive protection and assistance. On arrivim 
 in camps or oantonments the sutlers should not only be purveyors 
 but act as laundrymen also. Any sutler found pillaging should b 
 immediately delivered up for punishment. 
 
 Sometimes troopers detailed for the escort of general officer 
 are taken from this duty by the officers or employees of th 
 headquarters and forcibly transformed into servants for thes 
 gentlemen. Whenever an officer or noncommissioned officer find 
 a man of his regiment in charge of led horses not belongin i 
 to his command, he will question him, and if he discovers a 
 abuse of authority, he will, in the absence of written orders c 
 the general commanding, have the horses turned loose, and sen 
 the man to join his regiment. 
 
 100 
 
REAR GUARDS 
 
 REAR GUARDS. 
 
 |' Q. What is a rear-guard? 
 
 A. Troops detached to protect the rear of a command while 
 i marching. 
 
 Q. To whom should the command of a rear guard be intrusted? 
 A. To an officer who inspires the troops with perfect con- 
 fidence by the coolness of his judgment, the boldness and intre- 
 pidity of his actions. 
 
 Q. Why? 
 
 A. Because he will have to deal with an enemy whose audac- 
 ity will be doubled by the fact of our retreating. 
 
 Q. What is the duty of this officer? 
 
 A. To delay the approach of the enemy by every possible means, 
 and to perish rather than permit him to attack the force he is 
 charged with protecting. 
 
 I At the Beresina, an officer of the rear-guard, crushed by the 
 Russian fire, was losing all his men. In vain had he called upon 
 Ney for reinforcements. Not understanding the oause of Ney's 
 silence, he ran to him. “Of the five hundred men I had two hours 
 ago, four hundred are already dead" he said, excitedly. “The 
 Trappists do not leave the sides of their graves, and when one 
 of them says ‘Brother, we must die’, the other repeats, ‘Brother, 
 die we must'!" The officer returned to his post, under a hail of 
 shot. He had just resumed it, saying to himself, with grim 
 humor, “Brother, we must die", when a terrible voice — that of 
 Ney — responded, “Die we must!” The marshall remained a long 
 time with the rear-guard, encouraging it by his heroic example. 
 It was written that he should perish by the hands of assassins. 
 Q. Is there need of a rear-guard when the command is ad- 
 . vancing? 
 
 A. Yes. 
 
 Q. For what purpose? 
 
 A. To collect and drive forward the stragglers, and protect 
 the column from any enemy who may have got in rear of it; to 
 guard important defiles which there is reason to fear might fall 
 into the power of the enemy; to look out for ambusoades which 
 may have been passed unperceived by the main body; to scout 
 the flanks In rear of the marching column, and, sometimes, to 
 connect an advanced body with its supports. 
 
 Q. What should the rear-guard do when the troops to which 
 i It belongs are attacked and form line? 
 
 A. Unless there are orders to the contrary, it should join 
 
 them immediately and take its place in the line of battle. If, 
 
 however, it should discover the enemy executing a flank move- 
 
 ment and threatening the rear or one wing of the command, it 
 should move rapidly to meet the enemy, send notice to the com- 
 mander of the detachment, and immediately open fire. 
 
 Q. If the enemy endeavors to seize a defile which the de- 
 
 taohment must repass, what does the rear-guard do? 
 
 A. Sends warning to the detachment commander, and moves 
 cn rapidly to defend the defile. 
 
 Q. Should it march far in rear of the column? 
 
 A. The distance to be preserved between it and the column 
 depends mainly on the orders received; if they are not very pre- 
 :ise upon this point, it should keep to a greater distance in an 
 jpen country than in a close one, but always so as to see, or at 
 least be in easy communication with the detachment and 
 ’either lose its trace nor be separated from it by the enemy. 
 
 0- If. in spite of these precautions, such a separation should 
 incur, what should be done? 
 
 A. If the enemy is not too strong, break through his line and 
 101 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 rejoin the detachment. If this is believed to be impossible, be- 
 gin skirmishing at once with the enemy occupying the road, to 
 distract his attention and threaten him with serious attacks. 
 
 Q. If the enemy sends superior forces against the rear-guard? 
 
 A. It must retire at the gait employed in attacking; halt if j 
 the enemy halts; follow him if he retires, and harass him con- 
 tinually; should the detachment make a gap in his line, ma- 
 noeuvre so as to assist the movement, and then rejoin as quickly 
 as possible. V- 
 
 Q. What is the duty of the rear-guard in a retrograde move- 
 ment? 
 
 A. To protect and support the retreat. 
 
 Q. In that case, how does the rear-guard march? 
 
 A. At a distance always proportioned to the more or less open 
 nature of the country, but always at the gait employed by the 
 column, so as to run no risk of being separated from it, or dis- 
 turbing it by causing fears for the rear-guard, and also In suoh 
 a manner as to discover and repel, if possible, all attacks threaten- 
 ing the detachment. 
 
 Q. What formation does it keep? 
 
 A. That which is considered the best to prevent It from 
 being broken through. If it Is followed timidly, in an open 
 country, it preserves its line of skirmishers, which is extended or 
 contracted, according to the nature of the ground and the de- 
 monstrations of the enemy; but always estimating clearly the 
 reality and importance of these demonstrations, and so controlling 
 affairs as to be able to concentrate the whole force quickly. If 
 it Is forced vigorously on to a certain road, it leaves in rear only 
 a few skirmishers taken from among the bravest and best mounted 
 men. and makes the poorly mounted men, who could only embar- 
 rass and delay it move on in advance; then, supposing it Is a squad- 
 ron, it spaces its platoons on the road at a distance of a hundred 
 paces from each other. The platoons will retire thus: they regu- 
 late on one another and face to the front, at the same time tak- 
 ing care to support their right flank on the ditch, so as to leave 
 on their left an open space through which the skirmishers, when 
 charged, may pass without breaking them. If the first platoon is 
 repulsed It retreats to re-form in the rear, the second stands 
 fast, charges the enemy, and halts him for a few moments; if 
 it cannot hold on, it retreats and moves to the rear of the 
 first to re-form. The third charges, in its turn; and so on with 
 the fourth, first and second. 
 
 Q. If the road is not as wide as the front of a platoon? 
 
 A. The platoons are formed in columns of sections, by fours. 
 
 0- If the enemy has artillery, what should be done? 
 
 A. Post the greatest possible number of men on the flank of 
 the road, and make every effort to prevent Its being abandoned. 
 Hold fast to every turn of the road, to all the obstacles, to all 
 the different heights which will give protection against artillery 
 fire by preventing accurate aiming and raking the road directly. 
 Threaten the pieces sometimes, and try to form ambuscades if 
 it Is believed that they will meet with success. 
 
 Q. If, while retreating, a wood should be encountered? 
 
 A. Make a great display of holding it, in order to deoeive the 
 enemy In regard to the forces occupying it. If the enemy halts, 
 advance on him, and take advantage of his indecision to gain as 
 much time as possible; warning the column, however, of the halt 
 made and reporting the dispositions of the enemy, and taking the 
 necessary precautions to prevent being cut off by him. If the 
 detachment does not consider it advisable to halt, the rear-guard 
 is advised of the fact, and acts accordingly. If it takes a dif- 
 
 102 
 
REAR GUARDS 
 
 ferent road, a non-commissioned officer is left at the point where 
 it turns off, to direct the march of the rear-guard. 
 
 Q. If a village be met with? 
 
 A. The rear-guard aots in a similar manner, and profits by 
 the halt to barricade it with beams, carts with the wheels taken 
 off, etc. To do that, it masks its movements by a single platoon 
 which occupies the road while the others pass to the rear of the 
 barricade, in which only a small opening is left, for the successive 
 retreat, in single file, of the troopers of the last platoon of the 
 rear-guiard, as soon as it is threatened with a charge. If a 
 oharge should be made, it is awaited at the barricade, and received 
 with a discharge of carbines and pistols. 
 
 Q. In building barricades, what precaution should be taken? 
 
 A. That they are so placed as not to be easily turned; for 
 if they can be turned, they will be more dangerous than useful 
 to us. 
 
 Q. If a bridge is encountered? 
 
 A. Pass over rapidly, and make a stand In rear of it. If 
 built of wood so that it can be easily destroyed, proteot with 
 skirmishers those engaged in its destruction? 
 
 Q. How may a wooden bridge be destroyed? 
 
 A. By tearing up the floor and throwing the joists on your 
 r bank of the river, or by burning it. To burn it, straw and fagots 
 should be placed under it; if possible, tar should first be poured 
 over it. This operation is, however, always a slow one. 
 
 Q. Should it encounter a ford which it is desirable to destroy? 
 
 A. If near a village, try to collect a number of harrows and 
 throw them, teeth up, into the ford. Break bottles in the bottom 
 of the ford, or throw trees across the stream, the tops towards 
 the enemy. If the ford cannot be destroyed, barricade it like a 
 defile. If the enemy attempts to force a crossing, make a feint 
 of retreating, so as to let him enter the ford, and when the head 
 of his column has passed you, oharge It vigorously, and hurl It 
 Sack into the river. 
 
 Q. If the river is not fordable? 
 
 A. It is passed as desoribed in the ohapter on Detachments. 
 
 Q. If one crosses it in a ferry or in boats? 
 
 A. One does as described in the same chapter, only the boats 
 ire sunk after having been used. 
 
 An officer of the rear-guard should have under his command 
 lone but serviceable horses and active men, because his march 
 ihould not be delayed by the weakness of individuals. There- 
 ore, if he finds in his detachment any unserviceable horses, he 
 hould relieve himself of them at the first opportunity, by sending 
 hem to the main body. 
 
 Q. In general, then, what are the duties of the commander 
 f the rear-guard? 
 
 A. To delay the enemy’s march by every means suggested to 
 ilm by his intelligence; to prevent the enemy's estimating the 
 trength and composition of our columns, as well as the idea 
 rhich governs their movements; to moderate the gait of his horses 
 
 0 as to avoid distressing them, and to bring back all his men; 
 ot to allow himself to be cut off from the main body, and to 
 eep in constant communication with it; to support vigorously 
 hose of his men who have dismounted for the performance of 
 ny duty and never to allow himself to be driven back on a defile 
 hich cannot be passed without suffering severe loss. 
 
 Q. Do rear-guards march the same at night as in the daytime? 
 
 A. At night they draw nearer to the column, especially when 
 le night is dark, the enemy near, and the inhabitants hostile 
 ') us. 
 
 Q. And if they fear losing the trace of the column? 
 
 A. Some troopers are placed between them and the column 
 
 1 connecting files. 
 
 103 
 
THE CAVALRYMAN’S HAND-BOOK 
 
 Q. The troops protected by the rear-guard having halted to go 
 into bivouac, what should the rearguard do? 
 
 A. It takes position wherever it may be at the time, but the 
 detaohment causes it to be relieved promptly, for generally it ii 
 so much fatigued as to require perfect rest. It enters bivouao 
 and the men are sent to join their several squadrons. 
 
 The duties of the rear guard may be summed up in these three 
 words, which should form its device: vigilance, unity of action, 
 and firmness. 
 
 The dangers to which a rear-guard is subjected are gener- 
 ally in direct proportion to the greater or less degree of order 
 observed in the column which it protects. 
 
 LIGHT CAVALRY AND INFANTRY ACTING TOGETHER 
 
 If, on reconnaissance, advance or rear-guard, a body of infantry 
 falls temporarily under the command of a cavalry officer, he must 
 take the greatest care of it and regard it as his duty to spare 
 it more than his own mounted troops. 
 
 In bivouac the cavalry should share like brothers with the 
 infantry. In battle they should support it, and never abandon 
 it. If the country becomes open, let the cavalry hold the first 
 line; if it becomes close, the infantry should be nearer the enemy, 
 and the cavalry should watch its flanks, to prevent its being cut 
 off, and its rear, so that in case of repulse the infantry may find 
 a prompt and vigorous support. 
 
 If, while on rear-guard duly, these mixed troops should be 
 attacked by very surperior forces and compelled, as a matter of 
 prudence, to leave the direct route and take a less open one, 
 on which the defence may have greater chances of success, the 
 cavalry should consult, in advance, the convenience of the infantry, 
 and regulate its gait by the march and strength of the latter. 
 
 The cavalry officer should keep his infantry on the side where 
 the country is broken and interspersed with hedges, copses, vine- 
 yards, and hills. 
 
 If a foot soldier Is wounded let a trooper give him his horse, 
 and take his musket, until another horse, or a farm wagon, can 
 be obtained for the transport of the wounded man. 
 
 When the command halts for the night, the bivouac should be 
 chosen so as to shelter the infantry and protect it from surprise 
 by the enemy's cavalry. In this bivouac there should be no vedettes, 
 but only Infantry sentinels and continuous cavalry patrols. 
 
 With the advance-guard, the infantry should be kept out of 
 sight and shown only at the proper time. The unexpected appear- 
 ance of the infantry will produce a powerful effect on the enemy, 
 especially if his force consists of cavalry only. 
 
 An excellent way of disclosing the presence of infantry is to 
 place It In ambush, then lead the enemy’s cavalry In mass upon 
 it. A quarry, a copse in the open country, a garden wall at the 
 entrance to a village are all excellent places for conoealing troops, 
 especially if the infantry, desirous of performing its duty, keeps 
 silent, lowers its arms, removes its head-dresses, creeps and crawls 
 — in fact, employs every means to conceal its presence until the 
 arrival of the time for it to show itself and act. 
 
 Our cavalry should not hesitate to pass by the ambush, bul 
 should reform quickly and, with sabre in hand, charge back vigor- 
 ously and thoroughly after the infantry has fired its point-blank 
 volley. If it takes advantage of the enemy's surprise, it will 
 send him flying. If, in this affair, it does not succeed In cutting 
 the enemy in pieces, it will, at least, teach him to be more careful 
 the morale will rest with the victors, and it may be presumec 
 that the enemy will take no more chances with these same troops 
 
 104 
 
LIGHT CAVALRY AND INFANTRY 
 
 If you manoeuvre with the infantry be careful to avoid masking 
 their fire so as to hamper or paralyze their action. 
 
 Suppose that your detachment is composed of one battalion 
 and four squadrons, and that you are compelled to retreat across 
 an open plain. Put the infantry in the centre in echelons of 
 half battalions. On the right and left place a squadron in 
 column of platoons, and keep the other two squadrons united 
 in rear of the centre of the line. 
 
 The infantry will be able to give full effect to its fire. If 
 i threatened, its two lines will form squares in echelon. Your 
 squadrons on the wings will be like the arms of this body, acting 
 together as one man. The central position of the reserve squadrons 
 ' will enable them to reach, in a few seconds, any point threatened 
 by the enemy. 
 
 As soon as the ground becomes broken, so as to afford good 
 , positions for the infantry, the square farthest from the enemy will 
 take up one of them, occupy the line, and increase its fire in 
 jrder to protect the other, which will pass beyond their position 
 • bnd echelon itself, in turn, in rear, leaving the second half battalion 
 as rear-guard. If the squadrons on the wings have suffered, they 
 will be relieved by the central squadrons, whose place they will 
 take. 
 
 If the command is not to halt, the position will be held for a 
 short time only, and the retreat will continue in the same manner. 
 If the road is bordered on one side by vineyards, woods, hedges, 
 ditches, etc., and on the other by open ground, the cavalry will 
 retreat, in echelon, by the road or in the open ground, and the 
 infantry will retreat, in the same formation, under the protection 
 of the natural obstacles of the ground. 
 j Should the enemy, with superior forces, push our retreat vigor- 
 ously, when night comes the infantry will remain in our bivouacs 
 for a few hours only, to obtain absolutely needed rest; then it 
 will move on quietly, while our cavalry, of whom one half will 
 keep their horses bridled, will keep up the fires to deceive the 
 enemy, and will slowly retreat only an hour before sunrise. 
 
 If the confidence and determination shown by the enemy lead 
 us to fear that he may take advantage of the night to arrange 
 'ambuscades along the road we are to follow in the morning, we 
 should thwart his designs by silently leaving our bivouacs as 
 soon as the fires have been lighted, either to take up a new 
 position much farther to the rear and out of danger, or by leaving 
 the road and turning off to the right or left, in a direction which 
 the enemy could not possibly anticipate our choosing. 
 

 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
357.18 
 
 B797P